Home

FP2 ET-LAN Unit Technical Manual, ARCT1F322E-7

1. Address Name Setting value and explanation Initialieation Stored value 0 Initialization processing was completed successfully 2D0H processing fe gas ds Any other value Error code initialization processing ended in an error complete code Stored value Source node IP address when initialization processing was 2D1H rs node IP completed successfully oe The source node address in the initialization information setting area is written 2D2H poner a P The value is not entered until initialization processing has been completed successfully Communication Stored value 0 Communication function setting between networks is not used function setting aaa a y 2D3H b 1 Communication function setting between networks is used etween i fia eet es The value is not entered until initialization processing has been completed networks successfully Stored value Source node MEWTOCOL station number when initialization processing has been completed successfully Source node The source node MEWTOCOL station number in the initialization 2D4H e ra information setting area is written The value is not entered until initialization processing has been completed successfully 2D5H Stored value Source node Ethernet address in the EEPROM lower word Source node Example If 1 2 3 4 5 6 has been set 2D6H Ethernet 2D5H 0506H address 2D6H 0304H 2D7H 48 bits 2D7H 0102H higher word The value is not
2. Offset Name Stored value and explanation address A Transparent receive Stored value 0 Receive processing completed normally processing complete Other than 0 Error code when the receive processing ended in an error code Result is overwritten when receive processing is done again connections 1 to 8 The error code is stored in the error log area B Transparent receive Stored value Size of the transparent received data remaining in the ET unnotified data size LAN unit in bytes connections 1 to 8 Receive processing for this amount of data will finish normally and receive requests accepted even if the connection is closed Cc Transparent receive Stored value Copy of the size of the transparent received data remaining unnotified data size copy in the ET LAN unit in bytes connections 1 to 8 The same value as the transparent receive unnotified data size above is stored If the two values match the size of the transparent receive data will be fixed so after they match send a receive request using this value D Transparent receive Stored value Size of the data actually received for the receive request in notified data size transparent communication in byte units connections 1 to 8 It is not possible for this value to be notified as exceeding the receive request data size When the connection has been closed receive processing may end in some cases even if the receive request data size has not
3. Sree Name Br al Set value and Explanation Set value 1 to 40H 1 to 64 Partner node Set the station number of the partner node when MEW TOCOL MEWTOCOL communication is being carried out 5 peered 0000H Avoid duplicating the number of another station on the connections network Sed 1 to 8 This is ignored if MEWTOCOL communication is not being used Set value Ethernet address of partner node 6 0000H When using TCP Active open if the partner node has no ARP function specify this Partner node Example If 1 2 3 4 5 6 is set the offset addresses will be Ethernet 6 7 address 0000H 7 connections 8 1 to 8 If 0 or FFFFFFFFFFFFH is specified for this value 8 0000H processing will be carried out as though the partner node has an ARP function 9 A Reserved Used by the system B If any value is written to these it should be OOOOH C Set value Receive request data size in byte units This is specified if data is being received in transparent Receive communication No receive notification is made until data request data equal to the specified size has been received D size 0000H If FFFFH is specified direct reception is carried out the connections receive complete signal goes on each time a packet is 1 to 8 received Specify a size such that the receive request data size is less than or equal to the size of the receive buffer x 2 E Reserved Used by the system If any va
4. e y Auto connection function ON i Auto connection function OFF a Mode setting switch 2 ON Mode setting switch 2 OFF Initialization Auto initialization processing 1 Initialization processing processing using the ladder System connections 1 to 3 Connections 1 to 8 i program C 3 N YES lt Connections 1 t08 Ta are set using the H Jadder program i Open i processing i n pr in in System connection Auto open processing i Open processing using open processing the ladder Send f 1 Computing Send 1 Computing AE Send 1 Computing Send Receive Receive linking Receive linking Receive linking processing processing 2 Data transfer processing 2 Data transfer processing 2 Data transfer H i 3 Transparent 3 Transparent H communication t communication AS joi saith ic i Close System connection Auto close processing Lt Close processing processing _ ae eae aa i Termination Aaseni i n i processing uto termination processing ermination processing rN i A Auto initialization processing When the auto connection function is ON Setting mode switch 2 is ON the initialization processing is performed automatically At this time the initialization processing by the ladder program is invalid amp gt Reference Chapter 10 1 2 Auto Initialization Processing IEF ner Note The auto connection function is only available with Ve
5. Security in Filter error processing receiving completed e mails Password check OK Password error processing completed E mail receive processing Mail Filter function Mail Filter function enables you to receive e mails that satisfy the specified conditions when the ET LAN unit receives e mails Mail Filter function is avaialble for the following three items E mail address of the sender E mail address domain characters later than mark of the sender Contents of Subject in the e mail Example of Mail Filter function Targeted item to be set E mail address of the sender Keyword aaa bbb co jp When the conditions as shown in the example above are set the ET LAN unit receives only e mails that are sent from the specified e mail address For the Mail Filter function up to 20 e mail addresses can be registered Note Keyword as shown above must be entered within 50 characters Once even one filter item is registered for the Mail Filter function the ET LAN unit does not receive other e mails than ones specified for the Mail Filter function Aao Security password in receiving e mails A security password is used for password authentication when receiving the request e mail For an e mail that the ET LAN unit receives the password is authenticated to check if the received e mail is a request e mail This function prevents CPU data from being read and written by an
6. Note No accessories such as connectors or cables are included 1 1 3 Structure of Network ET LAN unit Ethernet LAN Computer link A We Router Ethernet LAN Ethernet LAN g MEWNET H T y O ET LAN unit a MEWNET H Communication functions of ET LAN unit Using the ET LAN unit to connect to an Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T or 10BASE5 enables 1 computer link function 2 data transfer function and 3 transparent communication function to be carried out with other programmable controllers and computers connected to the network Combined use with a conventional MEWNET The ET LAN unit can be used in combination with another network unit such as the MEWNET W W2 This makes it possible to connect an existing FA network to an Ethernet LAN using MEWNET 1 1 4 Connecting to a Network AFP2790 100BASE TX 10BASE T Retainer Check to make sure this has been poressed upwords if 1OOBASE TX 10BASE T is being used Push up Not used 100BASE TX 10BASE T connector RJ45 UTP cable 100BASE TX i tk 10BASE T hub Not used In an environment with a high noise level a ferrite core should be added near the UTP cable unit 100BASE TX 10BASE T connector RJ45 l enelannd Retainer Press downward when connecting connector Terminator Push 10BASES AUI Transceiver connector 10BASES5 12 VDC ii 1A or less Termin
7. cccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeseneeesaees 4 4 4 3 Confirmation of the Contents of the Shared Memory csseccsseceessesseeseseeeeeseeenees 4 5 4 3 1 Configuration of the Shared Memory cccccceseeceeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeseneeenaees 4 5 4 3 2 The Roles Played by the Various Areas ssesessssssssssirsssrrssrirrssrinnssinnnnrnnnssnnnsnnnn 4 6 4 4 Handshake Method ccscccceceeeceeeseeeeeenseeeeeenseaeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeedseeeeeenseeeeesaseenenenseeeenes 4 8 4 4 1 Handshake Method 00 eee cceeeceeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaeeeeeeaas 4 8 4 4 2 Using the I O for the Handshake eee eccececee cscs cree eae eras ceaeeeaeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeneeeaes 4 9 4 4 3 Using the Shared Memory for the Handshake eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeneeeneeenaees 4 10 5 Initialization Processing and Termination Processing 0008 5 1 5 1 Initialization Termination Processing ccccs secccseseeesseeeeeesseeeeeenseeeeeenseeneeenseeeeeenseeeees 5 2 5 1 1 What is Initializaiton Processing ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeee scenes eee eesaaeeeeeeeseeeetaeeeeeeteeeee 5 2 5 2 Processing PrOCOCUIES ccsseeececsseeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeesnsuaeeeseseeeeeseseeeeesnseenensnseeneees 5 4 5 2 1 An Overview of the Initialization Processing Procedure ccesceeeeeeeeteeeeteteeeeees 5 4 5 2 2 An Overview of the Termination Proce
8. Receive buffer for connection 1 1k words Transmission buffer for connection 1 1k words Transparent Receive buffer for communication connection 2 buffer area 1k words Transmission buffer for connection 2 1k words Receive buffer for connection 3 1k words Transmission buffer for connection 3 1k words g Key Point If the transparent communication function is not being used it is not necessary to write anything to these areas Please note that the various transparent communication buffer areas are not overlapped when changing them 5 2 4 Writing Data to the Routing Information Setting Area When communication is to be carried out between networks the necessary data is written to the routing information setting area of the shared memory Bank 0 Addresses 230H to 24FH using the shared memory writing instructions F151 WRT and P151 PWRT Initialization information setting area Bank 0 Address 230H to 24FH Shared memory Routing information setting area Connection information setting area User system area Initialization information notified area Connection information notified area Handshake area Error log area Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units 3 Key Point In order to make the routing information setting area valid 0001H should be set for the communication function setting bet
9. ccccesseeeesteeeeseeeeeees 11 15 11 8 2 Ladder Send E mail Settings cecccceeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseneeeeaees 11 17 11 8 3 Sample Program for sending e mails 0 cccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeteneeeeaees 11 18 11 9 Receiving E mails using the Ladder Program eccssseeccsseeeeeesseeeeeeeseeeenenseetenes 11 19 iv 11 9 1 Sample Program for receiving e mails cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeeeeeeneees 11 21 11 10 E mail Error Log and E mail Log Functions ccsseecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenneeeeeenees 11 22 11 10 1 What are the e mail error logs and e mail log functions ee eee eect teeters 11 22 11 10 2 Reading E mail Error LO seserian aaae a a a EAA E 11 23 11 10 39 Reading E maillogs zsessnoniesi iana EE E EE 11 25 11 104 E mail Status Area 250 aona a A e e AE AE 11 27 11 10 5 Sample Program sise ana iea a e a a e a A ah Ei 11 28 11 11 Troubleshooting Flowchart ssssssssuunnennnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnn 11 31 12 Error Log Function sinictitusdcenut ath intnneniveinetivetninibiuiavete ud cisthietnianbteiuinind el 12 1 12 1 Configuration of the Error Log Aread ccccssccssseeeeseeeeeseeeseeseseeeeneeeeseeesessaesneeeneeeeees 12 2 12 1 1 What is the Error Log Function ecccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeee cee eeeeaeeeeeeeseneeeseaeeetaeeneneeee 12 2 12 1 2 Contents of Error Log Area ecccc
10. 4 When the receive complete signal goes RI R42 on the receive request signal goes off lt SET gt 4 When the receive complete signal goes Ro R42 on the transmit request signal goes on lt RST gt When the transmit complete signal goes R3 on the transmit request signal goes off 9 21 aS ne Note This applies when the default allocations are used for the transmission buffers For this example the ET LAN unit has been installed in slot 0 Internal relay allocation Classification Device number Devices used in program example R1 Receive complete signal Complete signal area RO to R1F R2 Transmission complete signal R3 Transmission error signal R40 Receive request signal R5F request signa area RA0To MS R42 Transmission request signal 9 22 Chapter 10 Auto Connection 10 1 Auto Connection Function What is Auto Connection Function Auto connection function facilitates initialization processing and open processing setup of the ET LAN unit not with the ladder program but with the dedicated setup tool Configurator ET Auto connection function is available when the mode setting switch 2 which is located on the back of the ET LAN unit is turned ON The operation flow of the ET LAN unit is as shown below A Reference 2 1 3 Mode setting switch Operation flow of ET LAN unit
11. An error occurs if FFFFFFFDH or higher is specified The network subnetwork address is the address that results from the logical AND of the IP address for a source node and the network subnetwork mask in the same class and with the same network address Example If the source node IP address is 59010201H When FFOOOOOOH is specified for the network mask 59000000H will be the network address Class A network When FFFFOOOOH is specified for the subnetwork mask 59010000H will be the subnetwork address Class B network 15 9 Address Name Default Set value and explanation 232H Default router 0000H Set value Default router gateway IP address Gateway IP This is effective as long as the network subnetwork mask field is address L anything other than 0 233H Default router 0000H If the default router gateway IP address has been set Gateway IP communication will be carried out through the default router address H gateway without an error occurring even if the class network address or subnetwork address is different from that of the partner node The network subnetwork address for the default router gateway IP address must be identical to the network subnetwork address for the source node IP address If they are different an error will occur 00000000H and FFFFFFFFH will cause errors to occur 234H Number of 0000H Set value 0 to 5 registering router This
12. Attach a ferrite core to the power supply cable of the programmable controller example of ferrite core RFC 10 b Kitagawa Industrial Co Ltd An alternative measure is to use an optical transceiver close to the noise generating section of the equipment and install an optical fiber to keep the noise from affecting nearby equipment This is also effective as a lightning shield for outdoor wiring Caution Metal panels and metal ducts should be grounded at a grounding resistance of 100 or less Also metal panels and metal ducts should be insulated so that they do not come in contact with communication devices or cables IES ner Note Installation of LAN cables and devices A specialist should be consulted concerning construction work such as the installation of 100BASE TX and 10BASE T hubs the installation of the 10BASE5 AUI transceiver and laying of cables If this construction work is done incorrectly it can adversely affect the entire network and can cause accidents Taking corrective measures through the application Communication errors occurring in the ET LAN unit can be minimized by taking the steps outlined below Corrective measures should also be taken on the computer side such as increasing the number of times that data is sent 1 Increasing the number of times data is sent Adjust the TCP ULP packet existence time and TCP re send timer value parameters in the initial information setting area to increa
13. FFFFH to DTO check this on the programmable controller side 7 Pressing E at this point disconnects the line and exists the program 16 2 16 1 2 Workstation Sample Program The following shows an example of the make file and source file of the sample program run at the workstation make file cc c g lt DBSD DDEVICE ie0 Specify the Ethernet device of the machine OBJS fp3smp o fp3smp OBJS cc 0 OBJS o chmod g rwx OBJS lt source file lt studio h gt lt errno h gt lt ctype h gt lt string h gt lt sys types h gt lt sys socket h gt lt netdb h gt lt netinet h gt include include include include include include include include define D_SRC_PORT define D_DST_IP define D_DST_PORT define MEW_DST_NO define MEW_SRC_NO define OK define ERROR struct MEWTOCOL_stc 4098 192 9 201 130 4097 1 2 0 1 struct MEWTOCOL_stc int sno char FTI char padding unsigned char unsigned char unsigned char unsigned char unsigned char unsigned char char datasize_L datasize_H COMorDAT reserved 5 dst_rout src_rout data 2048 senddata recvedate Source node port No Partner node IP address Partner node port No Partner node MEWTOCOL station number Source node MEWTOCOL station number MEWTOCOL format Fixed 0 Data size
14. Reception processing When the ET LAN unit receives data from the communication circuit the reception notified signal goes on If a reception request is executed while this signal is on the received data is stored in the receive buffer of the shared memory Data is read from the receive buffer at the timing at which the reception complete signal goes on Transmission and receive buffers The transparent communication buffer area allocations connections 1 to 3 effective when the unit is shipped from the factory are as shown below See page 5 10 The first addresses and sizes of the transmission and receive buffers of connections 1 to 8 can be set to any desired values in the 6k words transparent communication buffer area by changing the contents of the initialization information settings The shared memory addresses indicated below are in word 16 bit units Absolute Shared memory address Bank No Address Receive buffer for connection 1 1k words Transmission buffer for connection 1 1k words Transparent Receive buffer for to communication connection 2 buffer area 1k words Transmission buffer for connection 2 1k words Receive buffer for connection 3 1k words Transmission buffer for connection 3 1k words Absolute address 2800 3FFFH 9 4 2 Procedure for Transmission Processing Transmission processing timing chart Transmission 2 Transmission request d
15. Starting word No Ending word No BCC 5 characters 5 characters x101 x100 x103 x102 x101 x100 x104 x103 x102 x101 x100 x161 x160 Destination First register contents Last register contents BCC 4 characters 4 characters CR x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 lower word higher word lower word higher word Error response Write error Contact code Data Notation Data register DT_ D To read the contents of an index register Command BCC 0 0 9 characters x161 x160 Register contents 4 characters x161 x160 x163 x162 a baas word higher word Normal response Read successful For 10 and 11 Register contents 10 Register contents 11 BCC 4 characters 4 characters CR x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 lower word higher word lower word higher word Contact code o pr Error response Read error 10 11 D 14 12 WD Write data area This writes the contents of the data area To write the contents of DT LD and FL Command The contact information is written as hexadecimal data in word units Starting word No Ending word No 5 characters 5 characters x104 x103 x102 x10 x100 x104 x103 x102 x10 x100 First writing data Last writing data BCC 4 characters 4 characters x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 169 x163 x162 x161 x160 aA lower word higher word lower word higher word Normal response
16. 8025H Transparent In transparent communication Carry out reception communication an attempt was made to processing after Reception reception error execute reception processing initialization and processing end although initialization open processing code processing was not completed have both been successfully completed There are also stored in 8026H An attempt was made to offset address A of the receive data from a partner reception processing node for which open end code of the processing has not been connection information completed using transparent notified area communication 8027H In transparent communication When receiving data an attempt was made to the transparent receive data although there communication was no reception buffer reception buffer area available must be specified for the pertinent connection this setting becomes valid when the initialization processing is executed 8028H In transparent communication Correct the reception an attempt was made to receive data although the reception request data size was set to 0 request data size 12 9 Code Name Description Step to take Remark 8030H MEWTOCOL In MEWTOCOL Carry out The value at the transmission communication an transmission left has been set error attempt was made to processing after for the send data although initialization and transmission initialization processing
17. ED Allocation of internal relays Classification Device number Device used in program example Complete signal area RO to R1F RD Initialization error signal Request signal area R40 to R5F R4C Initialization request signal Allocation of data registers Classification of Device T Program example processing number Siting ham setting DT10 to DT11 Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 a an Communication function setting between Initialization processing DT12 g Not used networks DT13 Source node MEWTOCOL station number 01 5 19 5 20 Chapter 6 Open Processing and Close Processing 6 1 Open Close Processing 6 1 1 What is Open Processing Setting the connection information used to carry out communication with a partner node and enabling communication is called open processing Connectors for up to eight connections can be opened with a single ET LAN unit The contents noted in the table below are set in the open information setting area of the shared memory in the unit for each connection When communication has been completed close processing can be used to release the connection Items set for open processing Setting area Setting item Communication method TCP IP or UDP IP Application being Open method Active Fullpassive or Unpassive used Application using the connection MEWTOCOL communication or transparent communication Open information setting Source node port No area Part
18. Send request signal OFF communication Send lete signal Send request signal Condition Send complete signal ON or send IRS Send error signal ON processing Send error signal peepee ey 4 Reading send processing complete data size P150 READ HO H 2 F K1 OT 261 fia complete signal r Conditions Send complete signal ON I 150 READ HO H 2EE K1 DT 265 Jrreeeeeeedene Reading the send processing complete code Send error signal Conditions Send error signal ON ED Example of transparent communication program Reception processing After the following program has been executed the received data is read from the receive buffer of the shared memory Initialization processing and open processing are automatically executed R9010 H AF150 READ Open complete signal 1 lii P150 READ HO Always on relay F151 WRT HO RII H P150 READ HO Open error signal R10 H AF0 MV K 1024 RC RIO RI H Receive complete signal complete signal Initialization complete signal 1 gt P151 WRT HO RC RIO RI m eceive complete signal Open complete signal bail j mization complete signal H Receive complete signal Receive request signal R10 H F HO Receive complete signal H 360 H2 WRO Jeeeeeeeee F Allocation of complete signal area RO to R1F Allocation of Complete signal area handshake area for WR 4 H2 H 368 Jenssen es t Allocation of request signal area R40 to R5F internal relay Request signal area H
19. and or Bcc are available User defined signature 4 editable Signature Fixed signature 1 A filter can be set for the incoming e mail using a keyword Mail Filter The filter is available for the e mail source address domain name and Subject Note1 It is possible to set the unit type to OSE by using a programming tool such as FPWIN GR Note2 Remote programming and monitoring through the LAN are available using the programming tool such as FPWIN GR Configurator ET does not support the connection via LAN Note3 The usable functions vary according to the version of the used ET LAN unit For the details refer to lt 1 4 1 Functions of ET LAN Unit and Applicable Versions gt Note4 System connection is used for communication to the programming tool e g FPWIN GR via LAN Note5 6K words transmit and receive combined can be freely allocated to the 8 connections Note6 This size includes E mail Address Book and signature data 15 1 3 Communication Specifications Item 100BASE TX Note1 10BASE T Note1 10BASE5 AFP2790 AFP2790 Target model AFP27901 AFP27901 AFP2790 Data transfer speed 100M bits s 10M bit s 10M bit s Transmission system Baseband Baseband Baseband Max segment length 100 m Note2 100 m Note2 500 m Max distance between nodes 205 m 2 segments 500 m 5 segments 2 500 m 5 segments Communication cable for connection Category 5 UTP cable Category
20. 8 bit8 Receive notified signal Connection 7 bit 9 Open error signal Connection 5 bit 9 Receive complete signal Connection 7 bit A Open complete signal Connection 6 bitA Send complete signal Connection 7 bit B Open error signal Connection 6 bitB Send error signal Connection 7 bit C Open complete signal Connection 7 bit C Receive notified signal Connection 8 bit D Open error signal Connection 7 bit D Receive complete signal Connection 8 bit E Open complete signal Connection 8 bitE Send complete signal Connection 8 bit F Open error signal Connection 8 bit F Send error signal Connection 8 bit 0 E mail receive complete signal bitO Receive error signal Connection 1 bit 1 E mail receive error signal bit1 Receive error signal Connection 2 bit 2 E mail send complete signal bit 2 Receive error signal Connection 3 bit 3 E mail send error signal bit 3 Receive error signal Connection 4 A bit 4 E mail log notified complete signal bit 4 Receive error signal Connection 5 T bit5 E mail error log notified complete signal bit5 Receive error signal Connection 6 bit 6 Reserved bit6 Receive error signal Connection 7 to amp bit7 Receive error signal Connection 8 bit F bit8 No communication time out signal Connection 1 bit9 No communication time out signal Connection 2 bit A No communication time out signal Connection 3 bit B_ No communication time out signal Connection 4
21. 801BH Destination A value other than 1 to 64 was Correct the MEWTOCOL MEWTOCOL set for the MEWTOCOL station station number of the station number setting error number of the partner node partner node 12 8 Code Name Description Step to take Remark 8020H Transparent In transparent communication Carry out communication an attempt was made to transmission Transmission transmission error execute transmission processing after processing end processing although initialization and code initialization processing was open processing not completed successfully have both been There are also stored in 8021H In transparent communication completed offset address E of the an attempt was made to send transmission processing data to a partner node for end code of the which open processing has connection information not been completed notified area 8022H n transparent communication Correct the an attempt was made to send transmission request data for which the data size transmission request data size is 0 8023H In transparent communication Correct the the specified transmission transmission request request data size exceeded data size twice the size of the transmission buffer 8024H In transparent communication Send data to a data could not be sent partner node for because the connection had which a connection been closed is open
22. Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec name method tion 1 tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 H hak angsnake ifia XA X8 Hei using I O ea nen Bank 0 Address 360H rome andshake Bito Bika Bit 8 signal using shared memoi Bank 0 Address 364H Bank 0 Address 365H X Bit 0 Bit 4 Bit 8 Bit C Bit 0 Bit 4 Bit 8 Bit C H hak andsnake il v50 Y24 Y28 2 nea using I O me roo Bank 0 Address 368H S ade z i Bito Bit4 Bit8 f using share 9 ee Bank 0 Address 36CH Bank 0 Address 36DH y Bit 0 Bit 4 Bit 8 Bit C Bit 0 Bit 4 Bit 8 Bit C 9 13 Receive notified signal bit Signal Handshake Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec name method tion1 tion 2 tion3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion7 tion 8 H hak andsnake s X5 x9 i using I O la seaana Bank 0 Address 360H Receive si eee Bit Bit5 Bito T i complete pok Bank 0 Address 364H Bank 0 Address 365H signal y Bit 1 Bit 5 Bit 9 Bit D Bit 1 Bit 5 Bit 9 Bit D Handshake Bank 0 Address 366H i hared using snared Bito Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bits Bit 6 Bit 7 memory LOO Note The I O number applies when the ET LAN unit has been installed in slot no 0 Reception error signals are used only when the handshake is carried out using the shared memory 9 14 Data areas used in transparent co
23. LD 06 Special internal relay WR 07 Special data register DT 08 Data register DT 09 File register FL OA 14 27 51H Read data area The specified number of words of data are read starting from the specified first word number of the data area Command Starting word No No of specified Area code words n x161 x160 x163 x162 x16 x160 x163 x162 lower word higher word lower word higher word Normal response Read successful T T 80H D1H FFH Data contents 1 Data contents n x16 x160 x163 x16 x161 x160 x163 x16 lower word higher word lower word higher word Reading data n items For communication with the ET LAN or MEWNET H MEWNET W2 network n 1 to 1020 For communication with the MEWNET P MEWNET W network n 1 to 16 Error response Read error 80H D1H Error code Area code Area type Area code Link relay WL 00 Internal relay WR 01 External output relay WY 02 External input relay WX 03 Timer counter set value area SV 04 Timer counter elapsed value area EV 05 Link data register LD 06 Special internal relay WR 07 Special data register DT 08 Data register DT 09 File register FL OA 14 28 52H Write contact information Writing is carried out to the specified contact of the contact area Command Contact information Area code Word No x161 x160 x16 x162
24. To specify 192 168 1 2 CO A8 01 02H DTn 2 0102H DTn 3 COA8H Partner node DTn 3 This is not necessary when using the Unpassive open mode of IP address H TCP IP Specify any port number for the partner node other than OH Partner node A value of 8000 1F40 or higher is recommended DTn 4 nae port No This is not necessary when using the Unpassive open mode of TCP IP Farner noae Always specify a MEWTOCOL station number of between 1H and DTn 5 MEWTOCOL i 40H 1 to 64 for the partner node computer station number When using the Active open mode of TCP IP if the partner node has DIn 6 no ARP function specify the Ethernet address of the partner node In Partner node any other case specify OH DTn 7 Ethernet Example To specify 1 2 3 4 5 6 address DTn 6 __0506H DTn 8 DTn 7 DTn 8 aS ne Note Because the reliability of communication cannot be assured with UDP IP we recommend using TCP IP We recommend specifying a port number of 8000 1F40 or higher Specify a MEWTOCOL station number within a range of 1 to 64 choosing a number that does not duplicate any other station number on the same network subnetwork When using the Active open mode if the partner node has no ARP function specify the Ethernet address of the partner node for DTn 6 to DTn 8 8 3 2 Writing to the Shared Memory The specified data is written to the connection information setting area of the shared memory using the sha
25. cd Note If the data code is IX or IY 0 should be specified for the four characters of the word number Dummy registrations are not possible when registering data to be monitored 14 18 2 character data code MG Monitoring start This monitors a contact or data that has been registered Command Destination G BCC Cr x10 x 10 x16 x 16 Normal response Monitoring successful No of characters Contact data 2 characters 2 characters x16 x160 x16 x160 pro ame SS lal 2 ng 4 characters 4 characters x16 x160 x16 x169 x16 x 162 x16 x160 x16 x162 x16 x160 lower word higher word lower word higher word 1 The base counter returns A if scanning took place ten times or more on the PLC side since the previous response Error response Monitoring error Error code BCC Cr x16 x169 x16 x160 Contact data is entered in the order registered starting from bit 0 of the contact data Data is entered in the order registered starting from the data 14 19 SC Preset contact area fill command This embeds the areas of the specified range for 16 on and off points Command Starting word No Ending word No Word preset pattern 4 characters 4 characters 4 characters x 103 x10 x10 x10 x109 x10 x10 x100f x16 x169 x163 x 162 eS _ lower word higher word BCC Cr x16 x160 Normal response Preset suc
26. interrupt E1 Int C1 to5 memg Performs an internal communication loopback test C1 to5 9014H loopback test E1 External C1 to5 Performs an external communication loopback test C1 to5 9015H loopback test E1 C1 to C8 LEDs and the TEST LED light at Test complete normal completion The error codes are stored in the error log area Action to take in response to errors Item Response action Check the communication circuit connection and after confirming that there are no other External loopback test nae i nodes communicating perform the test again There may be a hardware problem Switch the power off and on again and run the test Other tests again If the error persists please contact your dealer 3 8 Chapter 4 Confirming the Design Contents 4 1 Address Confirmation 4 1 1 IP Address Confirmation IP address confirmation An individual IP address is necessary in order to connect the ET LAN unit to an LAN environment Confirm the IP address with the person running the network system If two or more ET LAN units have been installed on one backplane individual IP addresses should be allocated to each one Ethernet address confirmation Individual Ethernet addresses for each unit are written to the internal EEPROM and are also noted on the plate affixed to the side of the unit This value can also be confirmed by checking the initial information notified area in
27. logs are overwritten starting with the oldest The number of logs will not be incremented past FFFFH 65535 Stored value Current number of log blocks available for reading in log buffer 387H Number of log This is cleared to 0 when initialization processing is carried out blocks used The count of the number of logs used will not be incremented past the buffer size Stored value Latest log information The unit itself updates the contents constantly so information can be read sy io Ea using the shared memory access instructions F150 READ and P150 PREAD without issuing a read request This is cleared to 0 when initialization processing is carried out Log block Stored value Data read during log block read processing reading Up to 14 blocks are stored in the log in the order in which the errors occurred 390H to en es 3FFH processing area when a read request is issued the error log notified request bit of the 8 words x 14 handshake area in the I O or shared memory goes on blocks This is cleared to 0 when initialization processing is carried out i on Note 1 Addresses 380H to 382H should be set before the error log notified request is issued 2 The ET LAN unit writes the latest values to addresses 385H to 38FH 3 The ET LAN unit writes values to addresses 390H to 3FFH after the error log notified request has been issued 12 4 12 2 Reading the Error Log 12 2 1 Procedure for Reading the Error Log
28. 0 unnotified Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address data size 2EBH 2FBH 30BH 31BH 32BH 33BH 34BH 35BH ee Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address se a 2ECH 2FCH 30CH 31CH 32CH 33CH 34CH 35CH Reception Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 cee Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address nae 2EAH 2FAH 30AH 31AH 32AH 33AH 34AH 35AH 9 15 9 5 Sample Program 9 5 1 Sample Program lt lnitialization to Open gt Program contents This sample program assumes that the ET LAN has been installed in slot no 0 l Message reception and ET LAN unit message transmission Internal relay allocation Classification Device number Devices used in program example RC Initialization complete signal Complete signal area RO to R1F RD Initialization error signal R11 Open error signal Connection 1 R4C Initialization request signal R50 Open request signal Connection 1 Request signal area R40 to R5F Data register allocation GEE e Wey Device number Setting item Setting for program example of processing Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 DT10 to DT11 COA80101H Initialization Communication function DT12 processing setting between networks Not used DT13 Source node MEWTOCOL 0iDummy sehihg station numbe
29. 0900 From etlan xxx yyy co jp To pc Zzz yyy co jp Subject Response EE RDO00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 CPU Unit Type FP2SH CPU version 1 07 ET LAN version 02 00 IP address 192 168 1 1 1 Subject Response is entered in the Subject column in the Response Mail 2 MEWTOCOL response MEWTOCOL COM response is sent back from the programmable controller 3 Signature for Response Mail A signature specified in Receive Option of Configurator ET is attached to the Response Mail Error messages When a message as shown below is written in the Response Mail 2 in the example above check the Request Mail Error message Description No good password A security password is not correct No good subject A subject is not correct No good command format METOCOL COM command format is not correct Correct format lt and are written in the header BCC is written in the last of the command No good multi frame A multiframe command is sent CPU response timeout error No response is returned from the CPU unit 11 14 11 8 Sending E mail Using the Ladder Program In the ladder send e mail function e mails can be sent by the instruction using the ladder program Using the ladder program of the CPU unit the e mail send processing is executed by turning ON the e mail send request signal in the handshake area which is allocated in the
30. 1 Table of Error Code The same error codes are used for the computer link function and data link function Link system error Error Error name Steps to take code 22H WACK error The receive buffer of the partner node has overflowed Steps to take Keep the data size within the maximum range 23H MEWTOCOL station The transmission has been interrupted because the MEWTOCOL station number No overlap of the source node duplicates that of another node Steps to take Change the setting for the MEWTOCOL station number and try again 24H ET LAN unit Hardware error in communication control unit hardware error Steps to take Turn the power supply off and then on again If the error still occurs replace the unit If the error does not occur the malfunction may have been caused by noise Check the installation and layout of the transmission line and the usage environment 26H MEWTOCOL station A value other than 01 to 64 has been specified for the MEWTOCOL station No setting error number of the source node Steps to take Specify a MEWTOCOL station number within a range of 01 to 64 27H No support error An attempt was made to send a packet that is not supported by the system Steps to take Please contact your dealer 28H No response error Timeout error while waiting for response from partner station Steps to take Use the application program to send the transmission again 30H Time out error Ongoing transmiss
31. 1 to 8 can be realized using connections 1 to 8 that can be For transparent communication only used the processes for connections 1 to 3 can be realized I O handshaking cannot be realized I O handshaking and shared memory handshaking can be used simultaneously a Note If both the I O and shared memory handshakes are used at the same time operation is as follows Input conditions such as complete signals and error signals are updated in both the input relay lt I O gt and the complete signal area lt shared memory gt Output conditions such as request signals operate under the logical OR of the output relay lt I O gt and the request signal area lt shared memory gt As a result if both are on the result is on and an off result is produced only if both are off 4 4 2 Using the I O for the Handshake The I O signals in the table below are used when a handshake is carried out between the CPU unit and the ET LAN unit using the I O Input Relay numbers indicate the numbers when installed in slot no 0 No Description No Description XO Receive notified signal Connection 1 X10 Open complete signal Connection 1 X1 Receive complete signal Connection 1 X11 Open error signal Connection 1 X2 Transmission complete signal Connection 1 X12 Open complete signal Connection 2 X3 Transmission e
32. 10BASE5 12 V DC Note Pin No Signal name 1 12V DC 2 GND 3 F G F G pin connects to the external metal shell of the 10BASE5 AUI 100BASE TX 10BASE T connectors and F G pin of the power supply unit Pins should be tightened firmly to a tightening torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m The power supply cable should be 0 5 to 2 5 mm AWG20 to 12 and the length of the stripped wire should be 7mm 2 4 Chapter 3 Connection for LAN Cable 3 1 Precautions Concerning Installation Noise resistance The Ethernet is a network used in offices and buildings where there is comparatively little noise It does not have a higher resistance to noise than ordinary FA application networks Consequently caution is required when installing the transceiver and hub and when laying cables Guidelines to noise generation If any of the following are occurring there is a danger that external noise is affecting the communication circuit The RX LED on the ET LAN unit is lighted or flashing whether or not communication is taking place at the moment Cause External noise from the communication circuit is penetrating the ET LAN unit and is being interpreted as a reception signal An error subsequent to error code 8020H has occurred Cause External noise from the communication circuit is penetrating the ET LAN unit and is causing a communication error An error subsequent to error code A001H has occurred
33. 15 Example of communication data Other hierarchy communication Response message Command message Route No 3 Relay station 1 z p j Station No 1 Route No Relay j station 2 ad Station No 12 OCH Route No 3 4 Relay Z station 3 lt 3 5 Bi Station No 13 ODH Destination 3 x A a Station No 14 OEH 7 16 When accessing CPU2 Other hierarchy communication Same hierarchy Fixed value Header block Level and depth of hierarchy C Station No for relay station 1 Destination station number Source station number Route No for relay station 1 Other hierarchy Data block MEWTOCOL COM Command message Data size L Data size H MEWTOCOL COM command data block Response message MEWTOCOL COM response data block When accessing CPU4 Other hierarchy communication Fixed value Header Level and depth block C of hierarchy Station No for relay station 2 Station No for relay station 3 Destination station number Source station number Route No for relay station 1 Route No for relay station 2 Data block MEWTOCOL COM Command message Data size L Data size H 00H 00H MEWTOCOL COM command data block Response message 10H 00H Data size L Data size H MEWTOCOL COM response data block Other hierarchy communication for MEWTOCOL COM Host computer comm
34. 23 10 2 3 System Connection Information Setting cccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeseeeeeaees 10 24 10 2 4 Reading system connection information settings ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 26 T1 Email PUM UO nn ciatsaatsnectnctiieecic tates caatenaerauheintcaatanescuetninetantanecdaubeinienaudls 11 1 11 1 Outline of E mail FUNCtION cc cess etee eee aaia aea pon asmi dadana oana a rmied naain an ereti eann pairina 11 2 11 1 1 E mail Function Specification 0 ccceccceceeeceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeess 11 2 11 2 Precautions When Using the E mail Function s sssssnseenunnennunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 11 3 11 3 Operation Enviroment seinor eaea raon aan aoa ao aaaea Kaaa e caaaeaee Enee sdana en ahann 11 5 11 4 Sending Receiving E mails Using E mail Function cssecceseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 11 6 11 5 E mail Fonction ireira AAEE cece AAA PEA AR 11 7 11 6 Security in Receiving E mails ccccsccsseceseeeeeseeseeesesneeenseeeeeeeeesseeseseaeeneeeeeeeneeas 11 10 11 7 Outline of Request E mail FUNCtiON ccsecceseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseaeenseeeeseeees 11 12 11 7 1 Request Mail Format cece eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 11 13 11 8 Sending E mail Using the Ladder Program cccssccssesseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeeeeeeees 11 15 11 8 1 E mail Send Processing Using the Ladder Program
35. 3 4 and 5 UTP cable Transceiver cable Max transceiver cable length 50 m Note3 Max number of nodes 100 nodes segment Node spacing Integer multiples of 2 5 m Note1 Switching between 100BASE TX and 10BASE T is done automatically by auto negotiation function Note2 The standards cite 100 m as the maximum but noise resistance measures such as attaching a ferrite core may be necessary in some cases depending on the usage environment Also if the hub is positioned close to a control board we recommend using it at a distance of 10 m or less Note3 The standards cite 50 m as the maximum but noise resistance measures such as attaching a ferrite core may be necessary in some cases depending on the usage environment Also if the transceiver is positioned close to a control board we recommend using it at a distance of 5 m or less 15 3 15 2 I O Allocation The I O signals in the table below are used when a handshake is carried out between the CPU unit and the ET LAN unit using the I O Input Contact numbers indicate the numbers when installed in slot no 0 No Description No Description X0 Receive notified signal Connection 1 X10 Open complete signal Connection 1 X1 Receive complete signal Connection 1 X11 Open error signal Connection 1 X2 Transmission co
36. 4 characters 160 x x101 x100 x161 x160 Values in are for T C Values in are for T C If the contact code is a dummy registration is entered 20 points max Register reset Destination x101 x10 x161 x160 Fixed 5 characters Normal response Registration successful Contact code _ Contact Notation y Internal relay R R L Source Error code BCC x101 x100 x16 x160 x161 x160 14 17 MD Register or Reset data monitored This registers data to be monitored Up to 16 points can be registered for one unit Command Data specification 2 WordNo 5 or 4 characters char char x101 x100 acters x104 x103 x102 acters x104 x109 x102 x101 Destination x100 If the data code has two characters the word number will consist of four digits 16 points max Register reset nae BCC Destination FleFleEleFl ele Cr x101 x100 x161 x160 rr Fixed 6 characters Normal response Registration successful Data code Data Data code BCC Data register DT D Source Lind data register LD L tot w0 weit i File register FL F Timer counter set value area SV S Timer counter elapsed value area EV K Error response Registration error Index register 10 IX Index register 11 IY BCC CR External input WX WX P External output WY WY 210 16 Internal relay WR WR Link relay WL WL J
37. Cause External noise from the communication circuit is penetrating the ET LAN unit and is causing a communication error Confirm the following items and take any necessary corrective action Check to see if the RXLED lights or flashes or if a communication error is occurring in synch with the operation of the device If either of these is happening in synch with the operation of the device take whatever measures are necessary to suppress the generation of noise from the device side Measures that can be taken in the installation environment The ET LAN unit transceiver hub and communication cables should be installed as fast as possible from high voltage wires high voltage equipment power lines power equipment equipment that generates strong breaker surges and the wiring for any of this equipment At least 100 mm of clearance should be allowed when installing the equipment 100 mm or more Noise generating device cable 100 mm or more 100 mm or more Ethernet If it is impossible to avoid installing the equipment or cables near noise generating equipment the following measures should be taken Place the programmable controller transceiver and hub inside metal panels Place communication cables inside metal ducts Attach a ferrite core near the ET LAN unit of the communication cable If using an external power supply terminal 12 V DC for the ET LAN unit attach a ferrite core to the power supply cable
38. Guide Book ARCT1F341E and the HELP window of Configurator ET E mails can be sent and received using the ladder program Ladder e mail send function and Ladder received e mail check function Data can be read via e mail using the e mail send receive function Request Mail function The e mail function can be used regardless of the auto connection function status That is the e mail function can be used either the mode setting switch 2 is ON or OFF 11 1 1 E mail Function Specification Item Descriptions Buffer memory size for storing e mail oe 96K bytes f A fixed message including error occurrence date time and Error Notice aa Mail the error code is sent to the entered destination when an error is detected in a CPU unit Up to 64 E mail is sent to the entered destination at the specified Supported p Report Mail intervals 1 to 120 min or at an appointed date Date and e mails can f e mail b time Up to three appointed times can be registered functions r distered Device Bit device watch X Y R L T and C 9 i Word device watch WX WY WR WL DT SV EV FL Watch Mail and LD M ee a Message specified in the ladder send e mail program secs A message can be edited within 2000 characters including E mail size a line feed every e mail Up to 32 addresses can be registered Address Evok To Cc and Bcc can be specified Us
39. L Data size H MEWTOCOL COM or MEWTOCOL DAT Fixed 0 Destination for MEWTOCOL station number Source for MEWTOCOL station number Data block size of MEWTOCOL format Communication buffer Socket 16 3 Function prototype declaration extern int main 0 extern int MewtocolClientOpen 0 extern int MewtocolSample 0 extern int MewtocolSendAndReceive 0 extern unsigned char BCC 0 int main argc argv int argc char argv Connection is opened if MewtocolClientOpen 0 OK puts Can t open connection return ERROR Communication is carried out MewtocolSample 0 Line is disconnected and processing is terminated close sno return OK Return OK Opening successfully completed ERROR Connection could not be opened int MewtocolClientOpen struct sockaddr_in SrcAddr Information of source node struct sockaddr_in DstAdar Information of partner node int err Socket is created if sno socket AF_INET SOCK_STREAM 0 lt 0 return ERROR Socket cannot be created Source node address is allocated to the socket that was created SrcAddr sin_family AF_INET SrcAddr sin_addr s_addr INADDR_ANY SrcAddr sin_port htons D_SRC_PORT if err bind sno struct sockaddr amp SrcAddr sizeof SrcAddr lt 0 Source node add
40. MEWTOCOL DAT command or message is converted to hexadecimal data and specified for the Data Size parameter The Station Number for Relay Station and Route Number for Relay Station parameters should be specified using the pertinent number If there is only one relay station the spaces for the second and third relay stations will be filled in closing the gap The station number of the station sending the command is specified for Source for MEWTOCOL station number The station number of the station receiving the command is specified for Destination for MEWTOCOL station number For the command the same value within a range of 01H to 03H should be specified for both the Hierarchy level LEVEL and Hierarchy depth DEPTH parameters With the responses Hierarchy level LEVEL is fixed at OOH Destination Source MEWTOCOL station No is specified by converting to hexadecimal data 3g Key Point The route number is a number that is automatically allocated to differentiate units if multiple link related units are being used on the same backplane With the FP2 this applies to ET LAN units multi wire link units and computer communication units Route numbers proceed in sequential order 1 2 3 starting from the unit nearest the CPU unit I O units other than link related units and advanced function units are not included in these routes Route No 1 4 3 R
41. Notation R Internal relay R Link relay L 14 10 WCP Write contact area plural points This turns multiple contacts on and off Command Contact No 4 characters x101 x100 x103 x102 x101 Destination Treated as io of multiple o aai points ai Contact Contact No BCC 4 characters 0 1 char CR x103 x102 x101 x100 acter x161 x160 Normal response Write successful Contact code Contact data Contact Notation External output Y Contact Notation Fon r BCC Source Error code x161 x160 4 Internal relay R R Link relay L LOFF o x101 x100 x16 x160 WCC Write contact area word units block This turns a contact on or off in word units Command The contact information is read as hexadecimal data in word units Starting word No Ending word No 4 characters 4 characters x101 x100 x103 x102 x101 x100 x109 x102 x101 x100 Destination Treated as word First contact information Last contact information 4 characters 4 characters x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 r amaA lower word higher word lower word higher word BCC Normal response Write successful T T Contact code Contact Notation External output Y Internal relay R R Link relay L 14 11 RD Read data area This reads the contents of the data area To read the contenis of DT LD and FL Command
42. Opening method 8 pei Application of connection connections 1 to 8 9 Reserved Used by the system Stored value 0 Receive processing completed normally Transparent Other than 0 Error code stored when the receive processing error receive processing A is completed complete code od i Result is written when receive processing is done again connections 1 to 8 3 The error code is stored in the error log area Transparent Stored value Size of the transparent received data remaining in the B receive unnotified ET LAN unit in bytes data size Receive processing for this amount of data will finish normally and connections 1 to 8 receive requests accepted even if the connection is closed Offset Name Stored value and Explanation address Stored value Copy of the size of the transparent received data remaining in the ET LAN unit in bytes Transparent receive unnotified The same value as the transparent receive unnotified data size C data size copy above is stored f If the two values match the size of the transparent receive data will connections 1 to 8 i be fixed so after they match send a receive request using this value Stored value Size of the data actually received for the receive request in transparent communication in byte units Transparent It is not possible for this value to be notified as exceeding the D receive notified re
43. SC1 1 Open processing has been completed 2 Connection is ongoing FF Open processing has been ended in error 043H System connection 2 status 0 Open processing wait status SC2 1 Open processing has been completed 2 Connection is ongoing FF Open processing has been ended in an error 044H System connection 3 status 0 Open processing wait status SC3 1 Open processing has been completed 2 Connection is on going FF Open processing has been ended in an error 045H Reserved Reserved Used in the system to 04FH 15 18 System connection information notified area Bank 10H Shared memory ll Ladder send e mail setting area Auto connection status check area System connection infor mation notified area E mail status area User system area 2 Reserved 2 K words E mail error log area E mail send log area E mail receive log area Address gt System connection 1 01FH information notified block Ta System connection 2 050H to 07FH 02FH information notified block at System connection 3 03FH information notified block Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units System connection information notified block Bank 010H Addresses 010H to 03FH Offset Name Stored value Explanation address 0 Open processing complete code Stored value System connections 1 to 3 0 Auto open processin
44. Sample Program This is a sample program in which data is being sent and received between an ET LAN unit and a workstation System configuration p Slot No 0 Workstation Ethernet LAN Setting conditions Items ET LAN unit Workstation IP address 192 9 210 130 If the network ID is the same as that of the ET LAN unit no host ID needs to be specified Port No 4097 4098 MEWTOCOL station No 01 02 Communication function MEWTOCOL communication PROTOCOL TCP IP Open method Unpassive Active bind connect Operation overview After a connection has been opened the workstation uses MEWTOCOL COM to send data to the ET LAN unit and writes it to the DTO of the programmable controller On the programmable controller side initialization processing and open processing of the ET LAN unit are carried out and 01 is set as the MEWTOCOL station number Usage method 1 Compile the sample program and create the execution file 2 Enter the RUN mode on the programmable controller side 3 Run the sample program 4 When the connection is successfully opened the sample program displays the following menu and waits for input Sample Menu 0 Clear DATA 1 Set DATA E End Test Please Push Key 0 or 1 or E 5 Pressing 0 at this points writes OH to DTO check this on the programmable controller side 6 Pressing 1 at this point writes
45. Unit and Applicable Versions 0 ccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 12 1 4 2 Precautions when using the e mail FUNCTION eee eeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeees 1 12 1 5 Unit Version and Communication Setting Method csccsseceseeseseesseeeeseeeeseees 1 13 15 Gontigurator E Teien be eee Heed deve bene fee teed lene Peeves dee eet 1 13 1 6 Restrictions Relating to Communication Conditions and Functions 1 13 1 6 1 Precautions When Using the FP2 CPU Uniit cccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenses eeaeeeeaeeeeeeeees 1 13 2 Names and Functions Of Parts cccscsssessssssceseneeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 2 1 Names and Functions Of Parts 0 cccsceseeeeee cece ee eeneeeeeee cess ee seneeeaeeeseeeeesenenaeeeseeeeneeneees 2 2 2 1 1 Names and Functions of Partsi anaa e aaae e aaar aaa a aa a aE 2 2 2 1 2 Operating Status LEDS vaie ai a aeaa a Gen tha aia 2 3 2 1 3 Mode Setting Switch ce ccccccceceeeceeeeeeeneeceeeeseaeeeenaeenaeeeceaeeeeaaesseneeseeeesaeeeeaaeesenees 2 3 2 2 Connector Pin LAyOut cccceeeeeeeeesseeeeseeeeeseeeeeaesesaaeeeseeeeneeeeseaeseseeeenseaeeeeesesnaeensenenenaes 2 4 2 2 1 10BASE5 AUI Connector with D SUB 15 pins retainer 0eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 2 4 2 2 2 100BASE TX 10BASE T Connector RJ45 0 0 ccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeeees 2 4 2 2 3 External Power Supply Terminal for 1OBASE5 12 V DO eesceeeeeeee
46. address DTn 6 DTn 8 DTn 7 DTn 8 ne Note We recommend specifying a port number of 8000 1F40 or higher When using the Active open mode if the partner node has no ARP function specify the Ethernet address of the partner node for DTn 6 to DTn 8 9 4 9 3 2 Writing to the Shared Memory The specified data is written to the connection information setting area of the shared memory using the shared memory writing instructions F151 WRT and P151 PWRT Shared memory address Address 250H to Connection 1 information setting block 25FH 260H to Connection 2 information setting block erage se n 26FH Initialization information 270H setting area to Connection 3 information setting block Routing information setting SEO area 5 Bank 0 to Connection 4 information setting block User system Connection information 28FH ooo O area setting area Address 290H Initialization information 250H to 2CFH gt sents Connection 5 information setting block notified area 20H S CC SS Connection information to Connection 6 information setting block notified area Soa Handshake area Ap Connection 7 information setting block 2C0H Error log area to Connection 8 information setting block 2CFH Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Program example If using connection 1 of the ET LAN unit installed in slot no 0 the program for writing data to the shared memory would
47. and explanation 200H Source node IP address 0000H Set value Source node address L Address example 192 168 1 1 CO A8 01 01H 201H Source node IP address 0000H IP address L 0101H H IP address H COA8H Any address other than 00000000H and FFFFFFFFH is valid 202H Communication function 0000H Set value setting between 0000H Communication between networks not used networks 0001H Communication between networks used Specifies whether or not communication is carried out between networks using a router When communication between networks is used the routing information setting area should also be specified 203H Source node 0000H Set value 01H to 40H 01 to 64 MEWTOCOL station Specifies the MEWTOCOL station no of the source node as a number value between 01 and 64 when MEWTOCOL communication is used Specify a number that does not overlap that of any other station on the network A dummy value should be set even if MEWTOCOL communication is not being carried out 204H Reset request flag 1 0000H Reset the ET LAN unit Write 55AAH to reset the ET LAN unit 205H Reset request flag 2 0000H Reset the ET LAN unit Write 55AAH to reset the ET LAN unit 206H Reset complete 0000H When the ET LAN unit has been reset 90FFH is set in this area notification 207H Reserved When any value is written it should be 0000H Used by the system 15 5 Address Name Default Set value and
48. and with the same network address Example If the source node IP address is 59010201H If FFOOOOOOH is specified for the network mask 59000000H will be the network address Class A network If FFFFOOOOH is specified for the subnetwork mask 59010000H will be the subnetwork address Class B network 232H Default router Gateway IP address L 0000H 233H Default router Gateway IP address H 0000H Se values Default router gateway IP address This is effective as long as the network subnetwork mask field is anything other than 0 If the default router gateway IP address has been set communication will be carried out through the default router gateway without an error occurring even if the class network address or subnetwork address is different from that of the destination node The network subnetwork address for the default router gateway IP address must be identical to the network subnetwork address for the source node IP address If they are different an error will occur 00000000H and FFFFFFFFH will cause errors to occur 234H Number of registering router 0000H Set value 0 to 5 This specifies the number of routers used on the source network The default router gateway is not included in the number of registered routers This is effective as long as the network subnetwork mask field is anything other than 0 Any value higher than 5
49. are notified of the description of the error by means of the error log a Reference Control Configurator ET Operational Guide Book ARCT1F341E 11 20 11 9 1 Sample Program for receiving e mails Program contents The sample program is for the ET LAN unit installed in Slot No 0 and the following contents are received when the internal relay R301 turns ON Internal relay allocation Classification Device No Device used in the program example Complete signal area RO to R1F RC Initialization complete signal E mail complete signal area R20 to R2F R20 E mail receive complete signal R21 E mail receive error signal E mail request signal area R40 to R4F R40 E mail receive request signal Customized contact R301 R301 User defined contact Program example R9010 Allocation of complete Hi H IF150 READ HO H 360 HI FRO Josoeeseectiosces 5 Always on relay Complete signal area signal area RO to R1F Allocation of Allocation of e mail complete handshake f F150 READ HO H 362 R HI E he 2 ae cial tae signal area R20 to R2F area for mail complete signal area Allocation of e mail request internal relay t F151 WRT gt HO WR 4 H 1 H36 perese signal area R40 to R4F E mail req uest Re Reo Ree Re ut hash ns E mail receive request ges ee Ai E a VENERO nitialization compiel USRI Pee complete sign E mail receive request signal signal ON adder sen fe oe E mail r
50. area is Reset Reset complete s flag notification cleared after the completion of reset F CF1I51WRT HO DT2 1 H1 H206 J function Reset complete R250 notification 34H HA F1 DMV HO WR 14 Reset Request signal The handshake area is cleared after flag area the completion of reset function F F1 DMV HO WR16 J Expanded R9010 request signal 49H FLFIS0READ HO H 360 H2 VRO J 4 Always ON Complete signal area F F150READ HO H 364 H3 WR2 J Expanded complete signal F F151 WRT HO WR14 H2 H 368 Request signal area F F151WRT HO _ WRI H2 H3eC J j Expanded R9013 request signal 87H FO MV K410 DT30 inital ON No communication ra time out a CRS i F1S1WRT HO lt DT30 K4 BA H209 J The no communication function is set No communication No coomunication base time 6 secs ag time out No communication time 6 x 10 CFOMV HY Tat o communication time 6 x 10 60 No communication Secs time type F CF151WRT HO DTI K1 H208 J No communication E eee ee L E E S 1 1 Execute the initial open 1 processing when the auto i 1 connection function is not used s sseee ee eee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee ee oe 1235H A Fo MV H55AA DTSO J C1 no Reset alla it flag flag Detect that Connection 1 No PILL a NR eh i KI Hen communication time out signal flag ON and execute the reset F CF151WRT HO DT50 Ki H205 J function Reset flag 149 ED 13 10 Chapter 14 MEWTO
51. bit C No communication time out signal Connection 5 bit D No communication time out signal Connection 6 bit E No communication time out signal Connection 7 bit F No communication time out signal Connection 8 z Note The same signal e g 360H bit 0 and 364H bit 0 Receive notified signal Connection 1 can be used in both the signal complete area and the expanded complete signal area It does not matter which signal is used in which area 15 21 Request signal area Bank 0 Expanded request signal area Bank 0 ne Note The same signal e g 360H bit 0 and 364H bit 0 Receive notified signal Connection 1 can Address Description Address Description bit 0 Receive request signal Connection 1 bitO Receive request signal Connection 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 2 Send request signal Connection 1 bit 2 Send request signal Connection 1 bit 3 bit 3 bit 4 Receive request signal Connection 2 bit 4 Receive request signal Connection 2 bit 5 bit 5 bit 6 Send request signal Connection 2 bit 6 Send request signal Connection 2 5 bit 7 amp bit 7 bit 8 Receive request signal Connection 3 8 bit 8 Receive request signal Connection 3 bit 9 bit 9 bit A Send request sign
52. code BCC x101 x100 x16 x160 x161 x160 1 1 Model code This expresses the CPU unit type as a 2 character decimal value Code Model 20 FP2 and FP2SH Version This expresses the CPU unit version as a 2 character decimal value For example 15 Ver 1 5 Program capacity This expresses the program capacity by specified by system register no 0 as a 2 character decimal value The value is expressed in k step units Code Program capacity Last step address 02 2k steps 1 534 n n steps 1 024 xn 152 2 For example If n 8 the value is 7 678 16 16k steps 15 870 32 32k steps 32 254 Note With the FP2SH this will be 0 14 21 Operation mode The contents of special internal relays R9020 to R9027 are expressed as 2 character hexadecimal values The user can check the settings of the mode selector switches on the CPU unit RUN PROG REMOTE whether normal operation or test operation is being used and other elements Values are read in binary notation as shown below 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L_ Test mode execution contents 1 RUN Operation mode C 0 PROG 0 Normal operation Test mode C 1 Test mode BRK command 0 Normal operation 1 step execution 1 When BRK 1 step is executed BRK command E 0 BRK command invalid execution enabled 1 BRK command execution enabled External output E
53. code Contact data Contact Notation Notation 1 OF internal relay R R Error code Link relay L x161 x160 RCP Read contact area plural point Command Contact No 4 characters o x16 x101 x100 Har i No of contacts Values are for TM CT points nates Contact specification n Contact No 4 characters x16 x108 x102 x101 x100 BCC x161 x160 Contact code Contact data __Contact__ Notation ON Internal relay R R 14 9 RCC Read contact area word units block This reads the on and off status of the contact in word units Command Starting word No Ending word No BCC 4 characters 4 characters Cr x103 x102 x101 x100 x103 x102 x101 x100 x161 x160 Treated as word Normal response Read successful The contact information is read as hexadecimal data in word units First contact information Last contact information gcc 4 characters 4 characters Cr x16 x 169 x163 x 162 x16 x160 x163 x162 x16 x160 lower word higher word lower word higher word Error response Read error Contact code Contact Notation Internal relay R R Error code x161 x160 WCS Write contact area single point This turns only one contact on or off Command Contact No 4 characters g Cr x102 x101 x100 acter x161 x160 Treated as single point Normal response Write successful Contact data Contact code Contact
54. corresponding to this value is completed normally 6 14 Port number settings Port numbers are allocated in order for the various communication processes provided by the TCP IP or UDP IP to be differentiated by the programmable controller or the computer The restrictions that apply to available port numbers are different for TCP IP and UDP IP as indicated in the table below Applicable communication Connection 2 port number Setting status of port no in open processing protocol TCP IP UDP IP g Source Fanner Multiple settings for both source Q Oo Connection 1_ o node port number and partner Available Available 5 Connection 2 node port number E f Source Partner D node node Single setting for source node Ipee port number multiple settings Not available Not available Connection 2 for partner node port number Source Partner 2 node node Multiple settings for source node o eomection 1 port number single setting for Available Not available TTO g g Connection 2 partner node port number 8 o Source Partner Neither source node port T Connection 1 p2 number nor partner node port Not available Not available Connection 2 mi number can be set to single setting Source Partner node node S o Connection 1 ze fe Multiple settings for source node c p 9 Available Available 2 port number Con
55. error by means of a receive processing end code and an error log 9 12 9 4 4 Handshake Signal and Data Area Handshake signals used in transparent communication The handshake area of the I O or the shared memory in the unit is used to execute communication processing Related to transmission processing Transmission request signal bit Signal Handshake Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec name method tion 1 tion 2 tion3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion7 tion 8 H hak andshake a Y26 Y2A gt Transmis using I O sion faethe Bank 0 Address 368H request andshake git2 Bite BitA l i 7 using shared signal mamo Bank 0 Address 36CH Bank 0 Address 36DH 4 Bit 2 Bit 6 Bit A Bit E Bit 2 Bit 6 Bit A Bit E H hak andshake s X6 XA Transmis using O sion Handshake Bank 0 Address 360H andshake complete hared Bit 2 Bit 6 Bit A using shar signal abide Bank 0 Address 364H Bank 0 Address 365H Bit 2 Bit 6 BitA BitE Bit 2 Bit 6 BitA Bit E H hak andshake iag X7 XB 5 d 5 T a using I O ee eee Bank 0 Address 360H Sioni error an shake Bit3 Bit 7 Bit B g g g g signal using shared meee Bank 0 Address 364H Bank 0 Address 365H 4 Bit 3 Bit 7 Bit B Bit F Bit 3 Bit 7 Bit B Bit F Related to transmission processing f Receive notified signal bit Signal Handshake
56. error format ET LAN could not e mail source recognize C114H Request e mail Processing for the received e mail Check the request e mail format execution error was not conducted successfully C115H E mail basic E mail receive processing was Check the e mail basic settings setting error for conducted although e mail basic receiving e settings were not set correctly mail The contents of the e mail when an error occurred are also stored in the mail error log area For the details of the mail error log refer to lt 11 10 Mail Error Log Mail Log Function gt 12 16 12 3 7 MEWTOCOL Error This error code is displayed when the information of the CPU unit cannot be obtained with the e mail sending function If this error occurs the E2 LED on the front panel of the ET LAN unit flashes Code Name Description Step to take Remark C200H CPU Communication processing with Turn OFF the power and then If this information CPU unit was not conducted turn it ON error acquisition error successfully If the error occurs again please occurs contact us the E2 LED on the front panel of the ET LAN unit flashes 12 3 8 Hardware Error These error codes are displayed if an error caused by the hardware occurs when using the auto connection function or e mail function If one of these errors occurs the E2 LED on the front panel of the ET LAN unit flashes Code Na
57. error was discovered during occurs the E2 LED the shared memory test on the front panel 9013H An error was discovered during of the ET LAN unit the EEPROM checksum test lights 9014H An error was discovered during the internal loopback test 9015H An error was discovered during Check the transmission the external loopback test line connections 9016H An error was discovered during Turn the power supply off the timer test and then on again 12 3 3 Warning Error This error code does not indicate a system error but alerts the user to a certain condition or status If this error occurs the E2 LED on the front panel of the ET LAN unit flashes Code Name Description Step to take Remark B003H No reception buffer Data has been destroyed at the connection destination In transparent communication data was sent to a connection with a transparent communication reception buffer size of 0 so the data was destroyed To receive the data specify a transparent communication reception buffer area for the pertinent connection this setting becomes effective when initialization processing is carried out If this error occurs the E2 LED on the front panel of the ET LAN unit flashes 12 12 12 3 4 Recovery Possible Error These error codes are displayed if an error occurs in the communication control unit If one of these errors occurs the E1 LED on the front panel of t
58. explanation 208H No 0000H Set the base time for the no communication connection communication detection timer value connection time 0000H x 2 minutes type Other than 0000H x 6 seconds 209H No 0000H Setting time Setting value 1 FFFFH x Base time communication Set the time to detect a no communication state after connection connection establishment detection timer The setting value of the above 208H is used as the base time value When the setting value is larger than 0064H in case of x 2 minutes 200 minutes in case of x 6 seconds 10 minutes 20AH TCP ULP OOOFH Setting time Set value 1 to FFFFH x 2 seconds packet existence 30 seconds With TCP this specifies the time that a packet exists when data duration transmission etc is carried out 20BH TCP zero window 0005H Setting time Set value 1 to FFFFH x 2 seconds timer value 10 seconds With TCP this specifies the time until the receive window size check packet is re sent when the receive window size of the other node becomes 0 20CH TCP re 0005H Setting time Set value 1 to FFFFH x 2 seconds transmission 10 seconds With TCP this specifies the time until data is re sent if ACK is timer value not sent by the other node when data transmission etc is carried out 20DH TCP closed timer 0001H Setting time Set value 1 to FFFFH x 2 seconds value 2 seconds This specifies the time waited until open processing is carried out when the sam
59. for Allocation of request signal area internal R40 to R5F relays Log mode 3 Log block reading pointer 1 Reads Error log starting from error code just prior from most fi ti recent value in orma ion Number of reading log block 7 ara Writes the reading setting to the error log area Error log notified request Reads the error code of the most recent log Reads the first error code after the most recent log Reads the second error code after the Error log most recent log information Reads the third error code after the most i recent log reading Reads the fourth error code after the most recent log Reads the fifth error code after the most recent log Reads the sixth error code after the most recent log Reads the seventh error code after the most recent log Classification Device number Devices used in sample program R1 Receive complete signal l R R1F SOMERAS aea me RF _ Error log notified complete signal Request signal area F40 to R5F R4F Error log notified request signal 12 6 12 3 Error Code Contents 12 3 1 Access Error This error code notifies the user that processing ended abnormally The addresses indicated in the Description column is the address of bank 0 unless refused Code Name Description Step to take Remark 8000H Source node OH or FFFFFFFFH was set for Correct the source node IP IP address error the source node
60. for handshake XC Bank 0 When shared memory is used for handshake Address 360H Bit C id Note Data should be written to the initialization information setting area and the routing information setting area before initialization processing is carried out before the request signal is turned on Data should not be written to these areas while the initialization complete signal is on 5 2 2 An Overview of the Termination Processing Procedure The following procedure is used to stop operation of the unit 1 Check to make sure that close processing has been completed for all of the connections 2 Turn off the initialization request signal 3 Check to make sure the initialization complete signal has gone off Le Note If the initialization request signal is turned off while a connection is open all of the connections will be forcibly closed Timing chart for initialization and termination processing Setting values and writing Shared memory accessing Initializatio request signal Initialization complete 5 2 3 Writing Data to the Initialization Information Setting Area The necessary data is written to the initialization information setting area Bank 0 0 Addresses 200H to 22FH of the shared memory using the shared memory writing instructions F151 WRT and P151 PWRT Shared memory User system area Initialization information setting area Routing informati
61. for reception Passive Active Partner IP address Partner port No Match Partner node uo e o o ps fo N Unpassive open Passive connection open The system is waiting for data to be received from an unspecified partner node in order to establish a connection In the Unpassive open method the connection information concerning the partner node should be read and confirmed when a connection has been opened Passive Active Source IP address Source IP address Source port No Source port No Partner IP address Source node Partner node Partner port No Connection open Active open I 6 5 Active open Active connection open The connection is actively established When the Active open is specified the source node should not begin Active open processing until the partner node has begun Fullpassive Unpassive open processing Active Passive Source IP address Source port No Partner IP address lt Partner IP address Ne Partner port No Partner port No Fullpassive open Active open Connection open Unpassive open Partner node o no e c o o gt fo N i Note Communication in the direction indicated by the dotted line arrow must be in agreement only if the partner node is in the Fullpassive open state 6 6 6 2 Processing Procedures 6 2 1 An Overview of the Open Processing Procedure 1 The data required for communication with the par
62. g Key Point The E2 LED will also light in the following cases If the ALM LED is lighted If an error occurred in a test mode 13 4 g Key Point The error log can be read using the programming tools and the following procedure 1 On the Tools menu select Force Input Output Function 2 Forcibly turn on the error log notified request signal Y2F and then turn it off again This reads the error log into 390H and subsequent addresses of the shared memory The I O number for Y2F changes depending on the position at which the unit is installed When the shared memory is used for the handshake the relay that reflects the error log notified request signal should be used 3 Cancel the force input output status 4 On the Tools menu select Display PLC Shared Memory This reads the PLC 5 Specify a slot number and specify 3F8H as the address 6 The log information is read No of read log blocks PLC Shared Memory Display Untitlel SlotNo 0 038 yak an 9000 0390 0000 9000 9000 0000 aooo 0000 0398 0000 9000 9000 0000 aooo 0o00 O3FEs aooo 0000 aooo 0000 aooo 000o aooo a000 aooo aooo aooo 000o aooo 0o00 9000 0000 aooo 0000 aooo oooa aooo aaoo aooo 0000 D o os O O ogpo 0000 9000 aooo oooo oooo 0000 odoo 0000 9000 oooo oooo oooo 0000 odoo 0000 9000 oooo oooo aooo 0000 03BEH odoo 9000 9000 9000 oooo oooo 0000 odoo 000
63. indicated below If the maximum message length is exceeded the message should be split into multiple sections and sent responses should be split into several frames and sent Header 118 characters lt Expanded header 2048 characters Some restrictions apply however based on the type and command Multiple frame commands and responses T Command AD code or BCC or Response Text data Cr mw wo code H U a j gaart ie Tema s Command D BCC AD BCC AD BCC or or Bas or Text amp cr or Text amp Cpl or Text x CR P g Response data z data z data a code H U H U H V H U H U l j l J l L J Horizontal parity range Delimiter Horizontal parity range Delimiter Horizontal parity range Terminator J l J First frame Intermediate frame Last frame 14 6 Sample communication timing chart 1 Single frame command and single frame response Host computer AD BCC CR Programmable controller lt AD BCC CR 2 Multiple frame command and single frame response Host computer AD Bcc amp Cr spe AD BCC amp Cr lt Fis a Programmable ap Bcc amp Cr an jecc amp CR controller lt s aa Host computer bs AD BCC CR Programmable AD BCC Cr controller lt 3 Single frame command and multiple frame response r 9 Host comput
64. information and routing information as shown below are set using the setup tool Configurator ET Under the condition that the auto connection function is valid the initialization processing is automatically conducted when the power is supplied to the programmable controller and the setting of the initialization processing has been changed Therefore the initialization request signal does not need to be ON Whether the auto initialization processing is completed or not can be checked using the initialization complete signal and the initialization error signal in the conventional I O handshake area or in the shared memory handshake complete signal area Items set with the Configurator ET during auto initialization processing Setting information Setting item Source node IP address Communication setting between networks Source node MEWTOCOL station number TCP ULP packet existence duration TCP zero window timer value Initialization information TCP re transmission timer value IP reassembling timer value Receiving buffer starting address for transparent communication Connections Receiving buffer size for transparent communication 1to8 Transmission buffer starting address for transparent communication Transmission buffer size for transparent communication Network sub network masking Default router IP address Routing information Number of registering router Routers Sub network add
65. information setting items using the dedicated setup tool Configurator ET For the connection to be used set the connection information settings as shown below Settings for up to 3 connections can be conducted System connection information setting item Name Seiting value mo Communication method Description Specify whether TCP IP is used or UDP IP is used for the currently set communication method Default value TCP IP Open method Application in which connection is used ource node port No Application being use n This is valid only when TCP IP is specified for the communication method Select Fullpassive or Unpassive Only MEWTOCOL communication can be used Specify any port number other than O A value of 8000 or higher is recommended Unpassive MEWTOCOL communication System connection 1 port 8500 System connection 2 port 8501 System connection 3 port 8502 Destination node IP address System connection information settings 1 to 3 lt When using TCP Fullpassive open gt Specify an IP address for the destination node that is in the same class and is other than 0 and 255 255 255 255 lt When using UDP gt Specify the IP address for the destination node that is in the same class and is other than OH lt When using TCP Unpassive gt No address needs to be specified 0 0 0 0 Dest
66. is the source node MEWTOCOL station number in the initialization information setting area The value is not valid until initialization processing has been completed successfully 2D5H Source node Ethernet Stored value Source node Ethernet address in the EEPROM lower address 48 bits Example When 1 2 3 4 5 6 has been set word 2D5H 0506H 2D6H 2D6H 0304H _ 2D7H 2D7H 0102H_ higher word The value is not valid until initialization processing has been completed successfully 2D8H Reserved Used by the system 2D9H 2DAH 2DBH 2DCH 2DDH 2DEH 2DFH 15 14 Connection information notified area Bank 0 Address 2E0H to Connection 1 information notified block 2EFH 2FOH to Connection 2 information notified block 2FFH Initialization information 300H setting area ae Connection 3 information notified block Shared memory Routing information setting pelt to Connection 4 information notified block User system Connection information me area setting area H to tion 5 informati ified block Initialization information gt 30FH Connection 5 information notified bloc notified area 330H Connection information pyre oe Connection 6 information notified block notified area 2E0H to 35FH 340H Handshake area 34FH Connection 7 information notified block 350H Error log area den Connection 8 information notified block Shared memory addresses are allocated in word unit
67. of complete signal area RO to Allocation of Always on relay Complete signal area R1F handshake area for F151WRT HO WR4 H2 H 368 f Allocation of request signal area R40 internal relays Request signal area to R5F R9013 F1 DMV H COABO101 DT 10 Jesters Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 Initialization pulse relay C0A80101H Fo mv HO DT 12 Communication between networks not used Fo mv H1 DT 13 Jerssssrsssssessnnsesersnsfesene Source node MEWTOCOL station number 01 F151WRT HO DT10 K4 H200 Writing to initialization information setting Initialization R9014 area processing eee Initialization request Initialization error signal Initialization request Initialization pulse relay signal P150 READ HO H2D0 K1 DT300 Error code read if processing ends in Initialization error signal error reading of initialization information notified area R9013 H Fo mv H300 DT 20 Jervsessseessesssnsnannsnafesses Selects MEWTOCOL protocol and Initialization pulse relay TCP IP Fullpassive open Fo MV K8000 DT 21 dabesecndecteccctaasecsnibossss Source node port No 8000 F1 DMV H COAB0102 DT 22 Jervsrressssessessnseeedpeseee Partner node IP address 192 168 1 2 COA80102H Open Fo MV K8000 DT 24 panedadodadsescebasiadteibdsees Partner node port No 8000 processing F0 MV H2 DT 25 Jevvsssessessessennnnnnsnapesees Partner node MEWTOCOL station number 02 F151 WRT HO DT20 K6 H250 e Writes t
68. open processing completed code had not been completed have both been 33 of the 8031H An attempt was made to completed MEWTOCOL send a MEWTOCOL transmission transmission to a partner control block node which had not been opened using MEWTOCOL 8032H In MEWTOCOL Send data toa communication a partner node for transmission error which a 39 occurred because the connection is connection was closed already open 8033H An error occurred when Run the sending data because of MEWTOCOL a format error in the transmission MEWTOCOL again ies 24 communication A packet specified a hierarchy level LEVEL or 8 or more packets 8034H An error occurred when Run the sending data because of MEWTOCOL a format error in the transmission MEWTOCOL again ties 24 communication A packet specified a hierarchy depth DEPTH or 8 or more packets 8035H An error occurred when Run the sending data because of MEWTOCOL a format error in the transmission MEWTOCOL again 35 communication A packet specified a message data size of 2 049 or more 8036H An error occurred when Run the sending data because of MEWTOCOL a format error in the transmission MEWTOCOL again communication A packet 27 was received that specified a value other than 10H 11H 20H or 21H as the first value 8040H Forced close The connection was Check the error forcibly closed by the partner node ora transmission error occurred and the source node forcibly closed the conne
69. request signal Open complete signal ppitialization complete signal R40 Je RST gt 4 Receive complete signal Receive request signal RI P150 PREAD HO Receive complete signal H2ED K1 9 20 signal is off Receive request signal goes on Conditions Initialization complete signal is on open complete signal is on receive complete signal is off Receive request signal goes on Conditions Receive complete signal is on Receive notified data size is read Condition Receive complete signal is on Transparent communication transmission processing 9 5 3 Sample Program lt Reception to Transmission gt Program example for transmitting received data as it is Transfer the received data to the transmission buffer Transmit data R100 HH FoMmv HFFFF DT 10 Jervsssssessssseeseseceeeeeeeseeefeeeee Receive request data size set direct receive F151 WRT HO DT10 H1 H25D ef Receive request data size writing R100 RI R2 R42 R40 sS Receive request signal on HHHH H lt SET gt R3 RI When the receive complete signal goes on P150 PREAD HO H2ED H1 DT 11 et Read the receive notification data size P151 WRT HO DT11 H1 H25F et Write to the transmission request data size P150 PREAD HA00 HO H400 DT 1000 Read the receive data P151 WRT HBOO DT 1000 H400 H O f Write to the transmission buffer R1 R40 lt RST gt
70. the error that may occur when sending and receiving e mails he error code is stored in the error log area For the minimum intervals to access the e mail server when sending receiving e mails check with the system administrator 11 4 Sending Receiving E mails Using E mail Function Before sending and receiving e mails with the ET LAN unit initialization processing for the ET LAN unit must be completed The e mail function can be used regardless of the auto connection function status That is the e mail function can be used either the mode setting switch 2 is ON or OFF E mail sending and receiving procedure using the ET LAN unit Initialization Reference Auto initialization processing When the auto connection function is OFF Refer to Chapter 5 Initialization processing and Termination processing When the auto connection function is ON Refer to 10 1 2 Auto Initialization Processing of this manual E mail sending Receiving processing Termination Auto termination processing Relations between initialization processing and E mail sending receiving processing Initialization processing Termination processing Initialization request signal Initialization complete signal E mail send receive processing ner Note When the initialization complete signal is ON e mails can be sent received When the e mail setup tool Configurator ET is used e mail settings can be changed either t
71. the shared memory Router address confirmation If the ET LAN is communicating with another node or nodes through a router the router IP address and the sub network address should be confirmed This is not necessary if communication is not being carried out with nodes of other networks through a router 3g Key Point If the network to which the ET LAN unit is connected is completely independent any IP address except for 0000 OOOOH and FFFF FFFFH may be allocated 4 1 2 MEWTOCOL Station Number Confirmation MEWTOCOL Station Number Confirmation This is used when communication destination nodes are specified with the computer link and data send functions MEWTOCOL station numbers should be set in such a way that they do not overlap with the addresses of other communication destination nodes Station numbers may be allocated within a range of 1 to 64 Allocating O will cause an error 4 2 I O Allocations 4 2 1 Confirmation of I O Allocations Allocating the ET LAN unit A total of 32 inputs and 32 outputs can be allocated for the ET LAN unit If the I O is not being used for the handshake the programming tools can be used to specify OSE to set the number of occupied points to 0 ET LAN unit X16D2 20 to 5F are occupied X20 to X3F WX2 WX3 to to XF Y1F Y40 to Y5F WY4 WY5 WX0 WY1 IES Note If I O installation allocation and Auto allocation are used
72. the slot No and specify 3F8H as the address 3 The log information is read 11 28 Example of reading the e mail send log area Bank 11H Addresses 000H to 1FFH PLC Shared Memory Display Untitle SlotNo 0 BankNo 17 Cursor Address 0000H 0459 0008H 0000 OO10H 0458 0000 0455 SH 0000 H 0452 H 0000 0000 8H 0000 H 0000 SH 0000 0000 8H 0000 0000 0078H 0000 8000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000l 0000 000l 0000 000l 0000 000l 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 8000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Y 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 oooo oooo Safety oee Daer l Send log block Send log block l Send log block l Send log block 0000 0203 0000 0203 0020 0203 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000l 0000 0003 0000 000l 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 S Older Address Help Detalls of the block This send log block shows that the registered No 3 e mail message is sent at 4 55 on Feb 3 to the addresses specified as shown below Address No 1 is s
73. this reason the system connection is suitable for communication with the PC tool EPWIN GR System connection can also be used for the communication method TCP IP or UDP IP open method Fullpassive or Unpassive and the application using the connection MEWTOCOL communication 10 2 1 Initialization processing in the system connection System connection can be used when the auto connection function is valid Mode setting switch 2 is ON To use the system connection function therefore auto initialization processing setting is required Q Reference 2 1 3 Auto Initialization Processing 10 2 2 Open processing in the system connection Open processing procedures in the system connection are the same as the auto open processing except for the setting items and contents Items set with the setup tool Configurator ET during system connection open processing Setting information Setting item Communication method TCP IP or UDP IP Application Open method Fullpassive or Unpassive being used Application using the connection MEWTOCOL communication Source node port No Destination node IP address Destination node port No Destination node MEWTOCOL station No Destination node Ethernet address Connection closing time min Open setting information 10 23 10 2 3 System Connection Information Setting Necessary data is set for the system connection
74. us setting communication processing The setting for this system register is effective for in the RUN mode only FP2SH In the PROG mode and 0 setting the allowable duration of time used for communication processing is set at 52428 us 31 Multi frame communication 6500 ms 10 0 to 81917 5 ms time settings in the Use of default setting 6500 ms is computer link and recommended communication time setting for data sending buffer 32 Tome out tome setting for 10000 10 0 to 81917 5 ms the SEND RECV and ms Use of default setting 10000 ms is RMRD RMWT instructions recommended Time 31 Multi frame communication 6500 ms 10 0 to 81900 0 ms setting time settings in the Use of default setting 6500 ms is for computer link recommended FP2SH 32 Tome out tome setting for 2000 ms 10 0 to 81900 0 ms the SEND RECV and RMRD RMWT instructions Use of default setting 2000 ms is recommended 15 25 15 4 2 Special Internal Relay transmission error flag 1 and 2 Address Name Description R9003 Intelligent unit error flag Turns on when an error occurs in an intelligent unit The slot number where the erroneous intelligent unit is installed is stored in DT90006 or DT90007 R9004 I O verification error flag Turns on when an I O verification error occurs The slot number of the I O unit where the verification error was occurred is stored in DT90010 or DT90011 R903
75. using the ladder program is specified The e mail message No registered using Configurator ET is specified If the No which is not registered is specified e mail message cannot be sent 007H Signature No 0000H Default OH Setting value 0 to 5H The signature which is attached to the e mail message using the ladder program is specified The fixed signature is determined as No 5 Other signatures than the fixed one registered using Configurator ET are determined as Nos 1 2 3 and 4 from the first one When 0 is specified a signature is not attached to the e mail If the value other than 0 to 5H is specified e mails cannot be sent 008H 009H 00AH 00BH Reserved Used in the system 00CH If necessary write OOOOH 0ODH OOEH OOFH 11 17 11 8 3 Sample Program for sending e mails This sample program is created on the assumption that the following settings are completed in advance using the setup tool Configurator ET E mail addresses are registered in the Nos 1 6 and 32 A message is registered in the Message No 1 Program contents The sample program is for the ET LAN unit installed in Slot No 0 and the following contents are sent using the ladder e mail send program when the internal relay R300 turns ON Internal relay allocation Classification Device No Device used in program example Complete signal area RO to R1F RC Ini
76. 0 Not output to external device enabled 4 Output to external device 1 step execution C 0 Normal operation enabled 1 1 step execution enabled F149 MSG P149 PMSG 1 When message is displayed instruction execution Operation mode 1 REMOTE I Error flag The statuses of the eight error flags special internal relays R9000 to R9007 are expressed as 2 character hexadecimal values They are read using binary notation as shown below 7 6 5 4 3 2 L_ Self diagnosis error Momentary stop detected Blow fuse detected Intelligent unit error When normal 0 I O verification error If error occurs 1 0 Battery error Battery error held Operation error flag Self diagnostic error code If an error occurs the self diagnosis error code is expressed as a 4 digit hexadecimal value Please be careful since self diagnosis error codes are normally treated as decimal values For example if the content is read as 2D00 in hexadecimal format the self diagnosis error code will be 2D In decimal notation it will be read as 45 Operation error If no error has occurred the value will be 0000 14 22 RR Read system register This reads the contents of the system registers Command ae Starting system Ending system Destination register No register No BCC Cr 3 characters 3 characters x101 x100 x101 x100 x
77. 0 9006 9000 oooo oooo 0000 03C8H odoo 0000 9000 9000 oooo oooo 000o odoo 0000 9000 9000 0000 oooo 0000 odoo 0000 9000 oooo oooo oooo 0000 o o o o o O Press Address button and specify 3F8H Error code Connection No error occurred 13 5 13 2 4 Troubleshooting Flowchart Error occurs Has transmission line been connected properly YES NO YES Is there a source of noise neaby NO If an I O hand shake is used has the I O allotment been correctly set to 32SX32SY NO YES Has initialization processing been completed NO YES Is the initialization request signal on Check the following items and make sure the connections have been made properly Cable connections Terminal resistance setting Node intervals Move the noise source as far away as possible from the communication cable or add a ferrite core to the communication cable Enter the correct setting Turn on the initializa NO tion request signal and carry out initialization processing YES Read the initialization processing end code bank 0 address 2D0H check the contents of the error and take corrective action The same contents are stored in the error log area as well Read the error log from the error log area check the contents of teh error and take corrective action Is teh E1 or E2 LED on the E
78. 0 SEND RECV instruction Monitors if CPU is in the SEND F145 or RECV F146 executing flag instruction executable condition as follows OFF None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed ON One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed R9031 SEND RECV instruction end flag Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of the SEND F145 RECV F146 instructions as follows OFF No abnormality detected ON An abnormality detected Communication error The error code is stored in DT90039 R9055 Intelligent communication unit 1 Turns on when the Error LED lights on the intelligent transmission error flag 1 and 2 communication unit R9056 Intelligent communication unit 2 Turns on when there is an error in the unit No Settings transmission error flag 1 and 2 R9057 Intelligent communication unit 3 Note1 The following units are included in the intelligent communication unit ET LAN unit Multi wire link unit MEWNET W2 mode Note2 Numbered 1 2 3 starting from the slot nearest the CPU unit 15 26 15 4 3 System Register Register No Name Description FP3 FP10SH FP2 FP2SH DT9006 DT90006 Abnormal intelligent unit When an error condition is detected in an intelligent Slot No 0 to 15 unit the bit corresponding to the slot of the unit will be DT9007 DT90007 Abnormal intelligent unit set to on Monitor using binary display Slot No
79. 00 DT25 Partner node MEWTOCOL 05 station number Source node route No 1 Data t i Partner node MEWTOCOL 05 AA ANSTO DT27 to DT28 station number processing Number of words 3 transferred bas data DT100 to DT102 Transfer data writing area 8 8 Program example Initializatoin pulse relay RC R9030 R10 Ate SEND RECV Open complete signal Initializatoin complete signal R500 H HH r145 PSEND DT 27 DT 100 DTO K 1000 SENN NEA Specifies source node from DTO on from DT1000 on s ED Specifies partner node R9010 H HH F150 READ HO H360 H2 WRO J Always on relay Complete signal area F150 READ HO H 364 H2 WR2 f eeepe Complete signal area F151 WRT HO WR4 H2 H 368 fe Request signal area F151 WRT HO WR6 H2 H36C f Request signal area R9013 HF1 Dmv H COA80101 DT 10 Jeees Initializatoin pulse relay Fo mv HO DT 12 Jevssessessesseennentere Fo MV H1 De eens ee F151WRT HO DT10 K4 H200 et R9014 RD R4C th H Initializatoin error relay Initializatoin Initializatoin pulse relay request signal H H P150 PREAD HO H200 K1 DT 300 e fe Initializatoin error signal R9013 H HH Fo MV H 300 DT 20 siaoasioei soosso sovisoiosess Initializatoin pulse relay Fo MV K8000 DT 21 ican accent F1 DMV H COAB0102 DT22 Jeej Fo MV Ks8000 DT 24 acassncnensacsasasnannccolnssnn Fo MV HS DT 25 sossconcesosoescnscescseapoosee F151
80. 1 For For Bcc To or Destination address 2 For To Address Nos 17 to 32 This setting is not required for the destination addresses Cc and Bcc 006H Message No 0000H Default OH Set value 1H to the numbers that are registered as e mail messages using Configurator ET The e mail message that you wish to send using the ladder program is specified The e mail message No registered using Configurator ET is specified 007H Signature No 0000H Default OH Set value 0 to 5H The signature which is attached to the e mail message using the ladder program is specified The fixed signature is determined as No 5 Other signatures than the fixed one registered using Configurator ET are determined as Nos 1 2 3 and 4 from the first one When 0 is specified a signature is not attached to the e mail 008H Reserved Used in the system 009H If necessary write OOOOH 00AH 00BH 00CH 00DH 00EH 0OFH 15 17 Auto connection status check area Bank 10H Address Name Explanation 040H Auto connection function 0 Auto connection function is invalid status 1 Auto connection function is valid 041H Normal connections 1 to 8 0 Setup tool setting is valid Ladder program setting is invalid Open processing setting 1 Ladder setting is valid Setup tool setting is invalid procedure 042H System connection 1 status 0 Open processing wait status
81. 1 processing information setting setting Communication between Not used networks Source node MEWTOCOL 1 station No Time setting Default Transparent communication setting Default 10 14 Setting using the ladder program Internal relay and data register allocation required for the ladder program are as shown below Internal relay allocation Classification of processing Device number Device used in program example Complete signal area RO to R1F RC Initialization complete signal RO Initialization error signal R11 Open error signal Connection 1 Request signal area R40 to R5F R4C Initialization request signal Data register allocation Classification of processing Device number Setting item Settings used in the program Open processing DT20 Open method MEWTOCOL communication TCP IP Full Passive open DT21 Source node port No 8000 DT22 to DT23 Destination node IP address 192 168 1 2 COA80102H DT24 Destination node port No 8000 DT25 Destination node 05 MEWTOCOL station No Data transfer DT22 to DT23 Source node route No 1 processing Destination node 05 MEWTOCOL station No Number of transferred 3 Data transfer area DT100 to DT102 words Transfer data writing area 10 15 Case 2 1 Ladder program example Same as the one which the X Programming is not required section as shown below is deleted from the l
82. 1 2 Operation If the E1 or E2 LED on the ET LAN Unit Lights or Flashes 13 3 13 2 What to Do If an Error OCCUIS cccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeeeneeesnaeseseeeenseeeseeseseaesnseeeeneeees 13 4 13 2 1 If the Alarm ALM LED Lights on the ET LAN Unit eseese 13 4 13 2 2 If the E1 LED on the ET LAN Unit Lights or Flahses 0 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 4 13 2 3 If the E2 LED on the ET LAN Unit Lights or Flashes seneese 13 4 13 2 4 Troubleshooting FIOWCHAart eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tence eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneaeeeeeeeaeess 13 6 13 3 RROSOUFUNCEI ON sinaia ace tech ee bocce a A bate ch leche ec ean tect 13 8 13 3 1 What is the Reset Function 0 cccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeseaeeetaeeeeneeees 13 8 13 3 2 No Communication Notification FUNCtION 0 ccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeneeees 13 8 13 3 3 Procedure of Reset Function eee ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeseneeeeeeeenaeens 13 9 13 3 4 Reset Function Sample Program cccccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeeseneeseeeessaeeseaeeeenees 13 10 14 MEWTOCOL Communication Procedure 0 ccesceeeceeceeseneceeseneees 14 1 14 1 MEWTOCOL COM Computer Link cc sccccesseeceeeseeeceensneeeeenseaeeeensneeeenseeeeeenss 14 2 14 1 1 Overview of MEWTOCOL COM 00 ceeccececeeceneeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeteaeeeneeeee 14 2 14 1 2 Single Frames and M
83. 102 10 12 Case 1 Ladder program example 10 te READ Ho H30 H2 Complete Allocation of complete signal area RO to R1F relay signal area f FISO READ HO H3 H2 o wR o Joceecees Allocation of complete signal area R20 to R3F Allocation of signal area handshake area for F151 WRT HO wre H2 Hose Joeeseeee t Allocation of request signal area R40 to RSF internal relays signal area Crist WRT HO WRG H2 E p e Allocation of expanded request signal area Request R60 to R7F R9013 signal area H Fri ow H COASOIO OT 10 Jrrssrresrresnessresreenresnrennnenneensennennn Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 C0A80101H Initialization pulse relay romv HO DT iz Pocrssnsesnesieusene eee crennuesseassenvesaesas t No communication between networks Fromv HI pris Javcncsceccccnceccncsccccncscescccesencssescees Source node MEWTOCOL station No 01 Initialization Crist wet HO oT 10 Ka 200 Jeeeeeeee t Writing to initialization information setting area processing 14 RO Rac ae n a y Initialization request Initialization error signal Initialization request signal Initialization pulse relay Ly eero READ Ho H200 KI or 300 FP aevesse Error code read if processing ends in error Initialization error signal reading of initialization information notified area p MEWTOCOL communication TCP IP Ls g tro 300 OT Joceeccecccscececceccecoccosoccceccosessocossoe dosos 5 id 3 Selection of F
84. 102 x101 x100 x161 x160 First system register Last system register contents contents BCC 4 characters 4 characters x16 x162 x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 lower word higher word lower word higher word Error response Read error WR Write system register This sets the system registers Command Starting system Ending system register No register No 3 characters 3 characters x101 x100 x102 x101 x100 First system register Last system register contents contents BCC 4 characters 4 characters x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 A lower word higher word lower word higher word Normal response Write successful 14 23 RM Remote control This switches the operation mode of the programmable controller It is effective only when the operation mode of the programmable controller is the REMOTE mode Command Destination x101 x100 Normal response Remote control successful Operation code Code Operation x161 x160 R __ PROGRAM mode RUN mode booting Pp _ RUN mode gt PROGRAM mode stopped Error response Remote control error or Source Errorcode BCC Cr lt x101 x10 x16 x160 x161 x160 AB Abort If a transmission is aborted while a multiple frame response is being received from the programmable controller this is issued from the side sending the command the computer side Command Destinatio
85. 16 points will be allocated automatically to each of the empty slots If a dual module type of CPU unit is being used the I O area occupied by the unit incorporated into the CPU unit should also be confirmed For information on I O allocations please refer to the FP2 Hardware Manual 4 3 4 2 2 Confirmation of Route Numbers When MEWTOCOL communication is being used if communication is being carried out with a node ona different hierarchical level the route number is used to specify that route These numbers are not necessary if the hierarchy link function is not being used If multiple link related units have been installed they are numbered route no 1 route no 2 route no 3 etc in sequence with route no 1 being the one closest to the CPU This route is not included for I O units and advanced function units other than link related units Example When one Multi wire link unit is being used at the same time Route No 1 Multi wire link unit ET LAN unit MEWNET W mode yg Key Point If any of the following units have also been installed a route no is specified that also includes these units Computer communication unit CCU Multi wire link unit MEWNET W mode Multi wire link unit MEWNET W2 mode 4 3 Confirmation of the Contents of the Shared Memory 4 3 1 Configuration of the Shared Memory Shared memory all
86. 16 to 31 lt Example gt ptso0e 1211 7 3 0 Ine DT90006 L L 15 11 7 3 0 Slot No 1 Abnormal 0 Normal DT9039 DT90039 SEND RECV instructions The error code is stored here if SEND RECV end code instruction F145 F146 was executed abnormally When the instruction was successfully executed 0 is stored DT9195 DT90195 Intelligent communication The link status is stored in the higher bytes unit 1 unit number 1 and 2 The unit number is stored in the lower bytes DT9196 DT90196 Intelligent communication S5 i o unit 2 unit number 1 and 2 l l DT9197 DT90197 Intelligent communication Link status Unit number unit 3 unit number 1 and 2 Note3 Note1 The following units are included in the intelligent communication unit ET LAN unit Multi wire link unit MEWNET W2 mode Note2 Numbered 1 2 3 starting from the slot nearest the CPU unit Note3 Used by the system 15 27 15 5 Minimum Transmission Delay Time The minimum transmission processing time for MEWTOCOL communication and transparent communication is determined using the formulas below This calculation serves as a general guide for the transmission time assuming that there is one connection being used no other nodes exist on the network and 1 1 communication is being carried out The actual transmission time may be longer depending on the load ratio of the network the transmission line environment the number of connecti
87. 2 Format when the partner node is not on the same hierarchy level as the MEWTOCOL communication If there is another link unit between the computer and the partner node acting as a relay station the partner node is said to be on a different hierarchy level from the computer With the ET LAN unit if the computer link function is being used with a unit on a different hierarchy level commands and responses are sent and received using the format noted below Format of command transmission data Format of response received data 10H 10H 00H 00H Data size L Data size L Data size H Data size H 00H 00H OOH 00H 00H 00H OOH 00H Hierarchy level LEVEL Hierarchy level LEVEL Fixed OOH Hierarchy depth DEPTH Hierarchy depth DEPTH MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 1 Source for MEWTOCOL station No MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 2 MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 1 MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 3 MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 2 Destination for MEWTOCOL station No MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 3 Source for MEVWTOCOL station No Destination for MEVVTOCOL station No Route No for relay station 1 Route No for relay station 1 Route No for relay station 2 Route No for relay station 2 Route No for relay station 3 Route No for relay station 3 MEWTOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM command data block response data block Max 2048 bytes Max 2048 bytes Precautions concerning format The number
88. 2 Communication Data Format 2 Format when the partner node is not on the same hierarchy level as the MEWTOCOL communication If there is another link unit between the computer and the partner node acting as a relay station the partner node is said to be on a different hierarchy level from the computer When the data transfer function is being used to send data to a unit on a different hierarchy commands and responses are sent and received using the format indicated below Format of command transmission data Format of response received data 10H 10H 00H 00H Data size L Data size L Data size H Data size H 02H 02H 00H 00H 02H 02H OOH OOH Hierarchy level LEVEL Hierarchy level LEVEL Fixed OOH Hierarchy depth DEPTH Hierarchy depth DEPTH MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 1 Source for MEWTOCOL station No MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 2 MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 1 MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 3 MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 2 Destination for MEWTOCOL station No MEWTOCOL station No for relay station 3 Source for MEVVTOCOL station No Destination for MEVVTOCOL station No Route No for relay station 1 Route No for relay station 1 Route No for relay station 2 Route No for relay station 2 Route No for relay station 3 Route No for relay station 3 Data block Data block Max 2048 bytes Max 2048 bytes Precautions concerning format The number of bytes comprising the
89. 2ED K1 DT 310 a Reading error code if processing ends in error Reading of connection information notified area DT 260 Yess scessse scsines sscccssewasscessssossssocsscoase Setting the receive request data size _ _ _ _ _ Writing the receive request data size Conditions Initialization complete signal ON DT 210 H1 H 25D aaa 77 Open complete signal ON Receive complete signal OFF R40 Send request signal SET gt Conditions Initialization complete signal ON Receive request signal Open complete signal ON Receive complete signal OFF gt Transparent R40 Receive request signal OFF communication SET gt Condition Receive complete signal ON or receive Open complete signal ON processing H 2ED K1 DT 211 Je Reading receive notified data size Conditions Receive complete signal ON 10 22 10 2 System Connection What is System Connection System connection is the connection set without using the ladder program and dedicated for the programmable controller during computer link communication For the system connection three connections can be used as well as the existing 8 connections Connections 1 to 8 yg Points For the connection that the auto open processing is executed the auto open processing setting may be ignored when the setup tool Configurator ET is used On the other hand the open processing setting for the system connection is not ignored when Configurator ET is used For
90. 3 information setting block Connection 4 information setting block Connection 5 information setting block Connection 6 information setting block Connection 7 information setting block Connection 8 information setting block The connection information setting area consists of eight blocks to match the number of connections The offset address contents from the table in the next page are allocated 3 Key Point Offset addresses 0 to 8 are written before open processing is carried out for the various connections Offset addresses D and F are used when communication processing is being carried out using the transparent communication function 6 9 Offset address orrsgi Name perau Set value and Explanation address value Set value 1 word data that sets the communication conditions for the various connections as bit information Bit 1514131211109 8 7 0 gt 9 0 0 9 0 7 gt 0 0 0 0 o 0 o a Communication b Open method c Application in which method 00 Active connection is used 0 TCP IP 10 Unpassive 0 Used as MEWTOCOL 1 UDP IP 11 Fullpassive communication 1 Used as transparent communication a Communication method Setting area Specify whether the communication method for each for application connection is TCP IP or UDP IP If using the data transfer 0 being used 0000H function always set TCP IP ee aaa b Opening method t08 This is vali
91. 9 792E C113 test xxxx yyy 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2 ee ee ee Older 0000 C000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 ee ee eee 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 s s s 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 s s s s 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 O000 0 000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 s s ooo0 oooo oooo oooo oooo oooo Hii Close Pearce Address Help Send error log block This error log block shows that the e mail is received from the source address etlan1_mail_test xxx yyy zzz at 1 14 on Feb 4 The contents of the block is the same as the one of the receive log block except for the added error codes Error code O210H 0114 0204 6574 6C61 6E31 5F6D 6169 6CSE4 7 etlanl_mail_ O218H 7465 7374 4078 7878 782E 7979 792E C113 te st xxxx yyy Receive error log block This error log block shows that the registered No 2 e mail message is sent to the addresses Nos 1 and 32 for To The contents of the block is the same as the one of the send log block except for the added error codes Error code 0000 1i 0l22 0204 0002 0000 8000 0001 00w O206H 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ba Reference lt 12 3 Error Code Contents gt 11 30 11 11 Troubleshooting Flowchart The troubleshooting flowchart applicable for using the e mail function is shown below E mail send processing E mail receive proce
92. 9 to F Reserved Reserved Note Only when the auto connection function is valid the information can be stored in the system connection information notified block 15 19 E mail status area Bank 10H Address Name Description 080H Number of e mail send The number of times that e mails have been sent normally is stored complete times The value is reset to 0 when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 081H Number of e mail send The number of times that e mails have not been sent normally is stored error times The value is reset to 0 when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 082H E mail re send status E mail re send status 1 is stored when the e mail re send processing is being executed When the re send processing is completed 0 is stored 083H to Reserved Used in the system 087H 088H Number of e mail The number of times that the e mail check is conducted to the e mail receive check times server is stored The value is reset to 0 when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 089H Number of e mail The number of errors issued when the e mail check is conducted is receive check error stored times The value is reset to 0 when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 08AH Number of e mail The num
93. 9 x no of command and response data bytes 12 4 CPU scan time ms Write contact data 0 007 x no of command and response data bytes 8 5 CPU scan time ms FP2SH Read contact data 0 013 x no of command and response data bytes 5 8 CPU CPU scan time ms Write contact data 0 011 x no of command and response data bytes 4 2 CPU scan time ms The above calculation formulas are used for both TCP IP and UDP IP The number of command data bytes and response data bytes are the total number of bytes including the MEWTOCOL format header and all of the data Example When using the FP2 CPU and reading 100 words of data with the computer link function RD command assuming a CPU scan time of 5 ms the following would result Transmission processing time 0 032 x 32 command bytes 421 response bytes 4 8 5 ms Approx 24 ms 15 28 Transparent communication The following is a guide to the transmission time when the ET LAN unit is sending or receiving data Computer ET LAN Transmission processing time Receive processing time When using TCP IP Transmission processing time 0 017 x no of transmission data bytes 8 ms Receive processing time 0 005 x no of receive data bytes 8 ms When using UDP IP Transmission processing time 0 017 x no of transmission data bytes 6 ms Receive processing time 0 005 x no of receive data bytes 6 ms The above calculation formula
94. ARCT1F322E 7 Panasonic PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP2 ET LAN Unit Technical Manual Applicable Model FP2 ET1 Model No AFP2790 Discontinued product FP2 ET2 Model No AFP27901 2013 12 panasonic net id pidsx global Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents To ensure that you use this product correctly read this User s Manual thoroughly before use Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts CAUTION If critical situations that could lead to user s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications Do not dismantle or remodel the
95. Bank No Slot No 8 7 8 3 3 Sample Program Program contents The sample program is for an ET LAN unit installed in slot no 0 and covers communication settings up to where the SEND instruction is executed after the connection is opened as a result of the contents noted below After the connection has been opened no communication program is necessary on the PLC side receiving the MEWTOCOL DAT commands Command gt c gt jNetwork te Reception of command t ET LAN unit message and sending of response message ET LAN unit Internal relay allocation Classification Device number Devices used in program example RC Initialization complete signal Complete signal area RO to R1F RD Initialization error signal R11 Open error signal Connection 1 Redvestsidnal rsa R40 to R5F R4C Initialization request signal q g R50 Open request signal Connection 1 Data register allocation EEN M2 Device number Seiting item Setting for program example of processing Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 DT10 to DT11 7 COA80101H Initialization DT12 Communication function Not used processing setting between networks DT13 Source node MEWTOCOL 01 station number Open method MEWTOCOL communication DT20 TCP IP Fullpassive open DT21 Source node port No 8000 Open processing Partner node IP address 192 168 1 2 DT22 to DT2 pies COA80102H DT24 Partner node port No 80
96. C 4 characters Cr x100 x161 x160 Last set value 4 characters x161 x160 x16 x162 x161 x160 BCC lower word higher word Ending timer counter No 4 characters x103 x102 x101 x100 Last writing data 4 characters x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 lower word higher word 14 15 RK Read elapsed value area This reads the elapsed value for a time counter Command Starting timer counter No Ending timer counter No BCC 4 characters 4 characters Cr x10 x102 x101 x100 x103 x102 x101 109 161x160 First elapsed value Last elapsed value BCC 4 characters 4 characters x163 x162 x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 lower word higher word lower word higher word Error response Read error WK Write elapsed value area This writes the elapsed value for a timer counter Command Starting timer counter No Ending timer counter No 4 characters 4 characters x103 x102 x10 x100 x103 x102 x101 x100 First writing data Last writing data 4 characters 4 characters x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 aA lower word higher word lower word higher word Normal response Write successful Error code x161 x160 14 16 MC Register or Reset contacts monitored This registers a contact to be monitored Up to 80 points can be registered for one unit Contact Contact specification specification Q Command Contact No Contact No 4 characters g
97. COL Communication Procedure 14 1 MEWTOCOL COM Computer Link 14 1 1 Overview of MEWTOCOL COM Command and response functions The computer sends commands instructions to the programmable controller and receives responses in return This enables the computer and programmable controller to converse with each other so that various kinds of information can be obtained and provided Computer Response Programmable controller Note A user program is required on the computer side in order to carry out a computer link No program is necessary on the programmable controller side Command and response formats Command message Desti Check Termi Host computer Header nation Text code nator Programmable controller Check Termi Header Source Text code nator Normal response message Note Dedicated procedures and conversational formats are used Transmissions are made by sending ASCII codes The computer has the first right of transmission and the right of transmission then shifts each time a message is sent 14 2 eS ne Note With MEWTOCOL communication through an ET LAN unit a format is used in which the special header shown below is added to MEWTOCOL COM commands and responses Special header for ET MEWTOCOL LAN unit command response The content of the special header changes depending on the communication conditions Control codes Name
98. Character ASCII code Explanation Header or lt 25H or 3CH Indicates the beginning of a message Command 23H Indicates that the data comprises a command message Normal 24H Indicates that the data comprises a normal response response message Error response 21H Indicates that the data comprises a response message when an error occurs Terminator CR ODH Indicates the end of a message Delimiter amp CR 26H Indicates a delimiter that splits data into multiple frames Destination and source AD H L Two digit decimal 01 to 64 ASCII codes Command messages contain a unit number for the programmable controller that receives the message Response messages contain the unit number of the programmable controller that is sending the response H indicates the upper digit and L the lower digit If there is no particular value to be specified 01 should be set When FF ASCII code table is used however the transmission is a global transmission sent to all units at once Note When a global transmission is sent no response to the command message is returned Block check code BCC H L Two digit hexadecimal 00 to FF ASCII codes These are codes horizontal parity that are used to detect errors in the transmitted data If is entered instead of BCC however messages can be transmitted without the BCC In this case the BCC is included with the response Error code Err
99. Connection closing time min Stored value When no communication is performed by the partner within the time specified here the connection is closed The value is not entered until auto initialization processing has been successfully completed 7 Reserved Used in the system 8 Communication method Stored value 1 word data that sets the communication conditions Open method for the various connections as bit information Application in which Connections L E 2 2 eeii 1 to 3 are used Le loloro eC o a Communication method b Open method c Application in which 0 TCP IP 10 Unpassive connection is used 1 UDP IP 01 Fullpassive 0 Used as MEWTOCOL communication For details refer to 6 2 3 Writing Data to the Connection Information Setting Area of FP2 ET LAN Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F322E The value is not entered until auto open processing has been successfully completed 9toF Reserved Used in the system 10 26 Chapter 11 E mail Function 11 1 Outline of E mail Function ET LAN unit supports three types of e mail functions Error Notice Mail Report Mail and Device Watch Mail The fixed interval function that the ET LAN unit checks received e mails in the mail server can also be specified These e mail functions can be set using setup tool Configurator ET la Reference For details concerning setup procedures refer to Control Configurator ET Operational
100. Decimal data Actual data Decimal hexadecimal data In the relay numbers for external input X external output Y internal relays R and link relays L the last digit is in hexadecimal notation while the preceding digits are in decimal notation In T C contact numbers all of the digits including the last digit are in decimal notation In this case the notation would read as follows X16 x10 x10 to Example Specification of command contact of contact area lead RCS Contact de Contact No 1 4 characters charac 3 2 1 0 ter x10 x10 x10 x16 nyu ngr O 4 EN ASCII letters Command contents X iF Combination of decimal and hexadecimal data Actual specification Note Data is limited to a certain number of characters For example the contact number above is specified using four characters so when the X1F contact area is read a 0 will be added at the beginning to fill out the number of characters and form a four character string 14 5 14 1 2 Single Frames and Multiple Frames Single frame commands and responses Horizontal parity range es Txt T T AD Command Command message code Response Normal response code meddage Error response meddage H Maximum message length The maximum message length for a single frame of a command or response the number of characters from the header to the terminator is as
101. ET to perform the initialization information settings and the connection information settings for both transmission and reception sides which are required for the open processing The setting descriptions are as shown below MOn ses Setting item Setting method m aS tait Internal relay allocation Ladder program lt I Initialization processing Configurator ET Open processing Configurator ET ET LAN unit Data transfer Ladder program Setting using the setup tool Configurator ET Transmission side Classification Setting item Description of processing Initialization Initialization Source Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 processing information node Communication function setting between networks Not used setting setting Source node MEWTOCOL station No 1 Time setting Default Transparent communication setting Default Open Connection Connection Open method Transparent processing setting information communication setting TCP IP Active Open Source node port No 8000 Destination node IP address 192 168 1 2 COA80102H Destination node port No 8000 Destination node MEWTOCOL station No 5 Connection closing time 1 Number of re open times 255 Reception side Classification Setting item Description of processing Initialization Initialization Source Source node IP address 192 168 1 2 processing informatio
102. ET LAN unit These specify TCP and UDP settings the method used for opening the ET LAN unit and the IP addresses and port numbers of the node at the other end These can be specified separately for each connection and are divided into eight blocks Initialization information notified area lt Addresses 2D0H to 2DFH gt When the initialization processing for the ET LAN unit has been completed successfully the specified conditions are stored at these addresses The contents stored here include source node IP addresses MEWTOCOL station numbers and other information If the initialization processing was not completed successfully the error code is stored here Connection information notified area lt Addresses 2E0H to 35FH gt When the open processing for the ET LAN unit has been completed successfully the specified conditions are stored at these addresses The contents stored here include IP addresses and port numbers for the destination nodes and other information If the open processing was not completed successfully the error code is stored here Handshake area lt Addresses 360H to 37FH gt This is the area in which the handshake takes place between the CPU unit and the ET LAN unit The requests and completions for various types of processing such as initialization opening and communication are carried out here as well as confirmation that processing has been completed If the I O is being used for the h
103. ET LAN unit E mail message to be sent can be specified by entering the necessary data in the ladder e mail send setting area using the ladder program Setting items for the ladder send e mail Setting item Description To The destination addresses based on the Cc No of the Address Book which is Recipient e mail registered using the setup tool address Bic Configurator ET are specified Up to 32 addresses can be specified each for To Cc and Bcc Using the ladder program the No of the message which is registered with the setup tool Configurator ET is specified Whether the signature is attached to a message or not is selected A signature is registered using the setup tool Configurator ET Ladder send e mail Selection of e mail message to be sent Selection of a signature T Reference Control Configurator ET Operational Guide Book ARCT1F341E 11 8 1 E mail Send Processing Using the Ladder Program Handshake using the shared memory A CPU unit requests the ET LAN unit for sending an e mail and checks if the e mail is successfully sent to the specified destination by means of a shared memory handshake a a Reference lt Chapter 4 Confirming the Design Contents gt E mail send complete signal area Bank 0 Address Description bit2 E mail send complete signal bit3 E mail send error signal 362H E mail send
104. ET LAN unit are met but the number of e mail receive check times and the number of e mail receive error are not counted If the status is found to be as noted below contact the network administrator The number of e mail send complete times is counted but the e mail is not sent to the recipient The number of e mail receive check times is counted when an email is sent to the ET LAN unit but the number of e mail receive complete times and the number of e mail receive error are not counted E mail status area Bank 10H Address Name Description 080H Number of e mail Stored value 0 FFFFH send complete The number of times that e mails have been sent normally is stored times The value is reset to 0 when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 081H Number of e mail Stored value 0 FFFFH send error The number of times that e mails have not been sent normally is stored The value is reset to 0 when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 082H E mail re send Stored value 0 FFFFH status E mail re send status 1 is stored when the e mail re send processing is being executed When the re send processing is completed 0 is stored 083H Reserved Used in the system 087H 088H Number of e mail Stored value 0 FFFFH receive check The number of times that e mails in the e mail server are checked is store
105. EWTOCOL COM data format from the computer to the programmable controller The computer can read from and write to the programmable controller s I O and registers The maximum message length for one frame is 2k bytes Using programming tools such as the FPWIN GR remote programming and monitoring can be done through a LAN circuit Data transfer function MEWTOCOL DAT binary communication Execution of the data transfer instruction F145 SEND P145 PSEND and F 46 RECV P146 PRECV by a programmable controller program allows data transfer communications between programmable controllers and between a programmable controller and a computer Data communication whereby the computer transfers the MEWTOCOL DAT data format to the programmable controller is also possible The computer can read from and write to the programmable controller s I O and registers The programmable controller can read from and write to the computer s virtual I O and virtual registers A programmable controller can read from and write to the I O and registers of another programmable controller partner node The maximum amount of data that can be transferred by execution of one data transfer instruction is 1020 words Computer link and Data transfer Computer Remote Computer programming lt Responsa and monitoring E 1 Data transfer lt s gt Ethernet Data transfer Response Data transfer Hierarchical communicat
106. FFH The reset complete notification is used to confirm that the ET LAN has been reset As this area is not automatically cleared it is necessary to clear separately Initial information setting area Bank 0 Address Name Default Setting value Explanation 206H Reset complete 0000H wren the ET LAN unit has been reset 90FFH is set in notification this area ic ne Note Approx 5 seconds as a maximum is needed to start the reset operation The reset operation should be executed when communication is not performed Turn off all the request signals in the handshake area after the completion of the reset 13 9 13 3 4 Reset Function Sample Program Program contents The sample program is for the ET LAN unit installed in Slot No 0 and the reset function is executed when the communication of connection 1 stops the no communication time out signal of connection 1 is on longer than 60 seconds after the open of connection 1 The request signal area in the handshake area should be cleared after the execution of the reset function The no communication time should be reset when starting the program operation and after executing the reset function R9010 OH H F1I50READ HO H206 H4 DT200 J Always ON R9010 R250 The completion of reset function uH i DT 200 H90FF te E operation is detected Always ON Reset R250 flag 19A FL FOMV HO OT J The reset complete notified
107. H L Two digit hexadecimal 00 to FF ASCII codes These indicate the contents if an error occurs 14 3 BCC Block Check Code The BCC is a code that carries out an error check using horizontal parity to improve the reliability of the data being sent The BCC uses an exclusive OR from the header to the final character of the text and converts the 8 bit data into a 2 character ASCII code Example 01 RC S X 0000 10 cr ttt tot Unit No 1 Reads Treated ContactX Contact 2 character contact as single input No 0 BCC point BOM EE EE If lt this is 3CH 0 30H 1 31H 23H R 52H Cc 43H S 53H X 58H 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H 1DH Takes exclusive OR BCC H 1 31H Converts to ASCII format BCC L D 44H 14 4 How data is notated in commands and responses Data used in commands and responses can be notated in the three ways described below Hexadecimal data X16 and 16 to indicate hexadecimal data Example Register contents in a data area read RD response T T T First register contents 4 characters x16 x16 x16 x16 3 2 A 4 0 ASCII letters Response contents A132H Hexadecimal data Actual data Decimal data X10 and x10 to indicate decimal data Example Initial word contents in a data area read RD command T T T T Starting word No 5 characters x10f x10 x10 x10 x16 eo 0 3 4 O ASCII letters Command contents 310
108. IP address address Initialization during initialization processing processing end code 8001H Subnetwork The uppermost 2 bits of the Correct the sub network There are also masking error sub network mask field have mask value stored in address not been set or a value of 2DOH of the FFFFFFFD or higher was set initialization 8002H Default router OH or FFFFFFFFH was set for Correct the IP address of Processing end Gateway the default router gateway IP the default router code of the IP address error address or an address was set gateway initialization that does not match the source information notified node network IP address area 8003H Router OH or FFFFFFFFH was set for Correct the router sub subnetwork the router sub network address network address The E1 LED on the address error front panel of the 8004H Router IP OH or FFFFFFFFH was set for Correct the router IP ET LAN unit lights address error the router IP address or an address address was set that does not match the source node network IP address 8005H Transparent An error in the first address or Correct the first address or communication size setting for the transparent size of the transparent buffer error communication buffer caused a communication buffer duplication in the buffer area or caused the available area to be exceeded 8007H Initialization An error occurred when the ET Run the initialization processing error LAN unit was carrying ou
109. LAN unit Multi wire link unit Computer communication unit 1 4 Restrictions on Unit Version and Functions The required versions of ET LAN unit and CPU unit vary according to the used functions 1 4 1 Functions of ET LAN Unit and Applicable Versions Functions of ET LAN Unit Version of ET LAN Unit Version of CPU unit Self diagnosis function Data transfer function FP2 CPU unit MEWTOCOL COM communication Available with all the versions of Ver 1 08 or later MEWTOCOL DAT communication ET LAN unit FP2SH CPU unit Transparent communication function Ver 1 02 or later Error log function Auto connection function FP2 CPU unit Auto connection Ver 2 00 or later of ET LAN unit is Ver 1 21 or later System connection required FP2SH CPU unit E mail function Ver 1 10 or later 1 4 2 Precautions when using the e mail function The calendar function is required for the CPU unit for using the e mail function Add the following optional memory with the calendar function for using the FP2 CPU unit Expansion memory unit FP2 EM1 AFP2201 FP2 EM2 AFP2202 FP2 EM3 AFP2203 It is not necessary to add the optional memory when using the FP2SH CPU unit as the calendar function is built in the CPU unit ie Reference lt FP2 FP2SH User s Manual ARCT1F320 2 3 1 Expansion Memory Unit ROM lt Option FP2 EM gt When there is no calendar function the time to be recorded in e mails is always the
110. O 380H Log mode Recovery O O O O possible error Warning error O B O Access error O E mail error O Set value Offset from latest log block of log buffer Default value 0000H To read the latest log block 0 is specified To read the oldest log block used 381H Log block Number of log blocks used 1 is specified see 387H below This value reading pointer should be set such that the number of log blocks used is greater than or equal to the log block reading pointer the number of log block being read If anything else is specified the results will be unclear Set value No of reading blocks Default value 0000H N This specifies the number of blocks up to the old block to be read from the log umber of i 382H reading log block block reading point Avalue of 14 or less should be set If a value of 15 or higher is set or if 0 is set 14 blocks will be read se Reserved Used by the system Stored value Log buffer size available with the unit itself number of log blocks 385H Log buffer size Set value 0100H 256 blocks This is set by the unit itself when it boots Stored value Cumulative total of log blocks recorded after initialization processing Total number of This is cleared to 0 when initialization processing is carried out 386H The number of logs is counted up to FFFFH 65535 but if an attempt is made og eae to record more logs than will fit into the available buffer space
111. Open request signal Connection 4 Y27 Y37 Y28 Receive request signal Connection 3 Y38 Open request signal Connection 5 Y29 Y39 Y2A Transmission request signal Connection 3 Y3A Open request signal Connection 6 Y2B Y3B Y2C Initialization request signal Y3C Open request signal Connection 7 Y2D Y3D Y2E Error LED flash off signal See note Y3E Open request signal Connection 8 Y2F Error log notified request signal Y3F cS ne Note If the Error LED flashing out request signal Y2E is turned on the flashing LEDs for E1 and E2 go out Also while the Error LED flashing out request signal Y2E is on the LEDs for E1 and E2 will not flash even if a recoverable error or a warning error occurs However these functions are not affected by error log processing so the error contents remain in the log 4 4 3 Using the Shared Memory for the Handshake Complete signal area bank 0 Expanded complete signal area bank 0 Address Description Address Description 360H bit O Receive notified signal Connection 1 364H bit 0 Receive notified signal Connection 1 bit 1 Receive complete signal Connection 1 bit 1 Receive complete signal Connect
112. Reading the latest log block The latest log block area in the error log area of the shared memory is read The unit itself updates the contents of the latest log block area constantly so it is not necessary to turn on the error log notified request signal Contents of the latest log block Address Description 388H Connection No See note 389H Error code 38AH to Reserved Used by the system 38FH Note If no connection number is specified 0 will be set Reading a particular log block The following area is set in the error log area of the shared memory Address Item 380H Log mode 381H Log block reading pointer 382H Number of reading log block 2 The error log notified request signal is turned on If the handshake is carried out through the I O Y2F is turned on If the handshake is carried out through the shared memory bit F of address 368H in the request signal area bank 0 is turned on 3 The error log is sent to the shared memory 4 Check to make sure the error log notified complete signal is on If the handshake was carried out through the I O make sure that XF is on If the handshake was carried out through the shared memory make sure that bit F of address 360H in the complete signal area bank 0 is on s Read the log block read processing area from addresses 390H in the error log area of the shared memory 6 The error log notified reque
113. Response message Data size L Data size H MEWTOCOL DAT response data block 8 15 8 4 3 Communication Data Format 3 Format when MEWTOCOL communication is being carried out from a PLC to a computer on the other hierarchy If there is another link unit between the PLC and the partner node acting as a relay station the PLC is said to be on a different hierarchy level from the computer The format in which the computer receives data from a PLC on a different hierarchy and sends responses is generally s shown below The format varies depending on the hierarchy position of the PLC on the sending side Command gt i Network lt Response Se ET LAN unit Command Response Computer reception Computer transmission 10H oo 0 0 0 02H 00H ojo O NM x So O CN amp valus of to are substituted for the responses shown at the left and the responses are setn The length of this space varies OY depending on the depth of the hierarchy co 9 K OH 2H 2H OH 7 O Of the received commands teh D MEWTOCOL DAT MEWTOCOL DAT MEWTOCOL DAT commands command data response data and messages are stored here block block SS A Precautions concerning format The number of bytes comprising the MEWTOCOL DAT command or message is converted to hexadecimal data and specified for the Data Size parameter O
114. T LAN unit lighted or flashing YES Has the connection where the error occurred been opened NO YES request signal Turn on the open NO request signal for the pertinent connection and carry out the opening processing Read the open processing end code for the pertinent connection check the contents of the error and take corrective action The same contents are stored in the error log area as well s there an error at the YES partner node involved in the communication NO YES Is there an error log in the error log area NO If you have a spare unit replace the malfunctioning unit with the spare one If the same problem occurs please contact your dealer Check the error contents for the partner node and other nodes and take corrective action Check the error contents in the error log and take corrective action 13 7 13 3 Reset Function 13 3 1 What is the Reset Function The reset function is used to restart only the ET LAN unit without cutting off the power supply for the system Using the reset function enables the ET LAN unit to be the operable state when an unrecoverable error has occurred in the ET LAN unit Also using the reset function periodically when the ET LAN unit is not communicating may help to prevent an accidental communication error The no communication notification function is available which is useful t
115. T1 AFP2790 670 mA FP2 ET LAN2 unit FP2 ET2 AFP27901 670 mA M Ka Reference For information on the internal current consumption of other units see the FP2 FP2SH User s Manual and the manuals provided with the other units 1 3 2 Restrictions on Installation Position The FP2 ET LAN unit may be installed only in the CPU backplane position However the units should be installed to the right of the power supply unit and CPU unit It cannot be installed in an expansion backplane CPU backplane QQAQAQQA Expansion cable T 1 l I i 1 1 1 j j i 1 i 1 j q Expansion backplane The FP2 ET LAN unit may be installed only in the CPU backplane position ET LAN unit 1 3 3 Restrictions on Number of Units that can be Installed The following restrictions apply when installing the ET LAN unit in a programmable controller Restrictions on number of units Unitname For FP2 CPU unit For FP2SH CPU unit ETAN an Up to 3 units Up to 8 units Multi wire link unit MEWNET W2 mode up to 2 units for link between PLCs up to 2 units for link between PLCs L Note If the hierarchical link function is being used through the MEWNET and the communication path includes an MEWNET W the maximum number of units that can be installed is two for the units noted below ET
116. User system area Initialization information setting area Routing information setting area Connection information setting area Initialization information notified area Connection information notified area Handshake area Error log area Bank 0 Address 250H to 2CFH Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Program example Address gt 250H to 25FH 260H to 26FH 270H to 27FH 280H to 28FH 290H to 29FH 2A0H to 2AFH 2B0H to 2BFH 2COH to 2CFH Connection 1 information setting block Connection 2 information setting block Connection 3 information setting block Connection 4 information setting block Connection 5 information setting block Connection 6 information setting block Connection 7 information setting block Connection 8 information setting block If using connection 1 of the ET LAN unit installed in slot no 0 the program for writing data to the shared memory would be as follows H F151 WRT H 0 DT n K6 H250 Destination in which data is stored a Slot No 0 Bank No first address of memo OOH ry area Writing to shared memory No of words Wri ting to shared memory First address 3g Key Point The slot number and bank number to be used by the shared memory writing instructions F151 WRT and P151 PWRT are specified as follows 15 1413121110 9 87654321
117. WRT HO DT20 K6 H250 Jefe RC R11 mH Open error signal Open request signal Initializatoin complete signal R11 H H P150 PREAD HO H2E0 K1 DT310 Open error signal R9013 H HHF1 puv H 1050003 DT 27 Jervereeereeeseeseemnenee Allocation of complete signal area RO to R1F Allocation of expanded complete signal area R20 to R3F Allocation of request signal area R40 to R5F Allocation of expanded request signal area R60 to R7F 01 Writing to initialization information setting area Initialization request Error code read if processing ends in error reading of initialization information notified area Selects MEWTOCOL protocol and TCP IP Fullpassive open Source node port No 8000 Partner node IP address 192 168 1 2 COA80102H Partner node port No 8000 Partner node MEWTOCOL station number 05 Writing to connection information setting area of connection 1 Open request for connection 1 after initialization processing has been completed Error code read if processing ends in error reading of connection information notified area Setting of control data Upper word Source node route no 1 Partner node MEWTCOL station no 5 Lower word Word transfer sends 3 words Execution conditions Initialization completed connection 1 open completed R9030 ON Data transfer execution Connects of source node from DT100 on 3 words sent to partner node from DT1000 on So
118. When 1 2 3 4 5 6 is set the offset addresses will be 8 to 8 0000H s o506F higher 7 _0304H word 8 _0102H _ When 0 or FFFFFFFFFFFFH is specified for this value processing will be carried out as though the partner node has an ARP function 9 Reserved Used by the system A When any value is written to these it should be 0000H B Cc D Receive 0000H Set value Receive request data size in byte units request data This is specified when data is being received in transparent size communication No receive notification is made until data equal to the connections specified size has been received 1 to 8 If FFFFH is specified direct reception is carried out the receive complete signal goes on each time a packet is received Specify a size such that the receive request data size is less than or equal to the size of the receive buffer x 2 E Reserved Used by the system When any value is written to these it should be OOOOH F Transmission 0000H Set value Transmission request data size in byte units request data size connections 1 to 8 When data is being sent using transparent communication specify the size of the data being sent in byte units Specify a size such that the transmission request data size is less than or equal to the size of the transmission buffer x 2 15 13 Initialization information notified area Bank 0 Shared memory setting area Initializat
119. Write successful Contact code Data Notation Data register DT D BCC Source Error code Link data register LD File register FL x101 x161 x160 x100 x160 x161 4 4 i 14 13 To write to an index register Command Writing to 10 and 11 Destination 0 0 x101 x100 9 characters Writing data 4 characters x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 eo YS lower word higher word Writing to 10 and 11 at the same time 32 bit data Destination 0 0 x101 x100 9 characters Writing data 10 Writing data 11 4 characters 4 characters x161 x160 x163 162 161 x160 x163 162 161 x160 lower word higher word lower word higher word Normal response Write successful Data code Data Notation EE A o ao e 10 114 D 14 14 RS Read set value area This reads the value set for a time counter Command Starting timer counter No 4 characters x103 x102 x101 x100 First set value 4 characters x163 x162 lower word higher word Error response Read error WS Write set value area This writes the value to be set for a timer counter Command Starting timer counter No 4 characters x10 x102 x101 x100 First writing data 4 characters x161 x160 x163 x162 Normal response Write successful Ending timer counter No x10 x102 x101 aaa lower word higher word BC
120. _ a E Bank No 7 8 Slot No 7 3 3 Sample Program Program contents The sample program is for an ET LAN unit installed in slot no 0 and covers communication settings up to where the connection is opened as a result of the contents noted below After the connection has been opened no communication program is necessary on the PLC side Internal relay allocation ET LAN unit Classification Device number Devices used in program example RC Initialization complete signal Complete signal area RO to R1F RD Initialization error signal R11 Open error signal Connection 1 Request signal area R40 to RSF R4C Initialization request signal R50 Open request signal Connection 1 Data register allocation Classification of processing Device number Seiting item Setting for program example Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 DT1 DT11 oe COA80101H Initialization DT12 Communication function Not used processing setting between networks DT13 Source node MEWTOCOL 01 station number Open method MEWTOCOL communication DT20 TCP IP Fullpassive open DT21 Source node port No 8000 Open processing Partner node IP address 192 168 1 2 DT22 to DT2 iene COA80102H DT24 Partner node port No 8000 DT25 Partner node MEWTOCOL 02 station number Program example R9010 H F150 READ HO H360 H2 WRO et Allocation
121. ables communication between personal computers workstations and FP series programmable controllers is supported as well as the transparent communication function that enables communication between general purpose devices such as computers Easy communication set up Communication settings can be easily performed using the setting tool Configurator ET Changing the mode setting switches enables the communication setting to be performed by a ladder program Using the system connection enables easy connections with devices such as a programming tool FPWIN GR 1 2 E mail send and receive functions for a standard equipment Sending e mails Errors occurred in the programmable controller can be notified via e mail E mails can be sent at the specified time The devices of programmable controller are monitored and e mails can be sent when the designated conditions are satisfied Receiving e mails Receiving an e mail described in a specific format enables to notify the status of the programmable controller via e mail A broad range of self diagnosis functions A function that checks the hardware and the communication status during operation A function that checks the hardware and the communication status when the test mode is accessed An error log function that records the results of various checks 1 1 2 Unit Type Name Part No Model No FP2 ET LAN unit FP2 ET1 AFP2790 FP2 ET LAN2 unit FP2 ET2 AFP27901
122. adder program in Case 1 010 P itso READ HO H380 a ORS R0 1 Always on relay Complete signal area F150 READ HO H34 a H2 gt W2 1 Complete signal area Allocation of handshake area for F151 WAT HO wa a R gt H368 1 Request signal area internal relays F151 WAT WO WE H2 4H 36C 1 Request signal area As the auto initialization processing is set initial processing using the x Programming is not required ladder program is not required Initialization processing Ma H 1P150 READ Initialization error signal Open processing Fo wv F151 WRT Rit 7 Initialization ae Open request signal P150 READ HO oF 310 Open error signal PE tes ow s Initialization pulse relay bja ajo _ SEND RECV Open complete signal Initialization complete signal pias gt na Data transfer 10 16 Case 2 2 When the auto connection function is used Configurator ET is used and connection setting is performed using the Configurator ET The following settings are required using the ladder program When the initialization processing is set using the Configurator ET the auto initialization processing is automatically conducted without setting the initialization processing using the ladder program When setting the connection required for open processing is performed using the Configurator ET the open processing auto connection open processing is automatically conducted without s
123. al Connection 3 bit A Send request signal Connection 3 bit B bit B bit C Initialization request signal bit C_ Receive request signal Connection 4 bit D bit D bitE ERR LED flash off signal bitE Send request signal Connection 4 bit F Error log notified request signal bit F bit 0 Open request signal Connection 1 bitO Receive request signal Connection 5 bit 1 bit 1 bit 2 Open request signal Connection 2 bit 2 Send request signal Connection 5 bit 3 bit 3 bit 4 Open request signal Connection 3 bit 4 Receive request signal Connection 6 bit 5 bit 5 bit 6 Open request signal Connection 4 bit6 Send request signal Connection 6 3 bit 7 a bit 7 bit 8 Open request signal Connection 5 8 bit8 Receive request signal Connection 7 bit 9 bit 9 bit A Open request signal Connection 6 bitA Send request signal Connection 7 bit B bit B bit C Open request signal Connection 7 bitC Receive request signal Connection 8 bit D bit D bit E Open request signal Connection 8 bitE Send request signal Connection 8 bit F bit F bit 0 E mail receive request signal bit 1 bit 2 E mail send request signal x bit 3 S bit4 E mail log notified request signal of bit 5 E mail error log notified request signal bit 6 Reserved to bit F in both the signal complete area and the expanded complete signal area It does not matter which signal is used in which area If the ERR LED flash off signal 68H bit E i
124. also stored in the error log area Stored value Source node port numbers for various connections Source node port x 1 No after open processing has been completed The value is not entered until open processing has been connections 1 to 8 successfully completed Partner node IP 2 address L Stored value Partner node IP addresses for various connections connections 1 to 8 after open processing has been completed Partner node IP The value is not entered until open processing has been 3 address H successfully completed connections 1 to 8 Stored value Partner node IP port numbers for various connections Partner node port f 4 No after open processing has been completed The value is not entered until open processing has been connections 1 to 8 successfully completed Partner node Stored value Partner node MEWTOCOL station numbers for 5 MEWTOCOL various connections after open processing has been completed station number The value is not entered until open processing has been connections 1 to 8 successfully completed Connection closing Stored value Specified unused connection disconnect time 6 time The value is not entered until initial processing has been connections 1 to 8 successfully completed Re opening 7 information connections 1 to 8 Communicaton They are stored only when the auto connection function is available method i For the details refer to 10 1 5 Auto Connection Information
125. and transmission source Ethernet LAN Fa e fa 5 xo w E y wo m Multi wire link unit MEWNET W2 mode S yew Specifies the route number of this unit S Ethernet LAN Specifies the MEWTOCOL staiton number of this unit MEWNET W2 Ethernet LAN z8 Specifies the route number of this unit g 2 Depth 1 E Multi wire link unit MEWNET W2 mode E Specifies the MEWTOCOL station number of this unit g Ethernet LAN 5 MWENET H link unit Specifies the route number of this unit 3rd hierarchy Depth 2 Seeks Ethernet LAN Specifies the MEWTOCOL staiton number of this unit MEWNET H ierarch h S m x if i Depth 3 a ie MWENET H link unit Specifies the MEWTOCOL station number of this unit 7 18 Chapter 8 Data Transfer Function 8 1 An Overview of the Data Transfer Function 8 1 1 What is the Data Transfer Function With the data transfer function in the ET LAN unit program instructions the SEND and RECV instructions in the programmable controller are used to transfer data Data can be transferred between the units indicated below Between open PLC and another Between a PLC and computer The maximum amount of data that can be transferred with a single data transfer instructions is 1020 words I O and register 1 SAna reading l and writing Network T i jE E l ESE lasa ET LAN unit ET LAN unit SEND ins
126. andshake these addresses do not need to be used Error log area lt Addresses 380H to 3FFH gt Error related information such as the contents of communication errors and unsuccessfully completed processing as well as the contents of unit errors are stored here as error codes Up to 14 codes can be stored here at one time for each unit The contents of these addresses can be confirmed using the shared memory readout menu in the programming tools Ladder send e mail setting area lt Bank 10H Addresses 000H to 03FH gt Used when e mails are sent using the ladder program Used to specify the e mail destination address and message Auto connection status check area lt Bank 10H Addresses 040H to 04FH gt Used to check whether the auto connection function is used or not Used to check the open status of each connection 1 to 8 System connection information notified area lt Bank 10H Addresses 050H to 07FH gt Used to check the setting status of each system connection 1 to 3 E mail status area lt Bank 10H Addresses 080H to 08FH gt E mail send receive status is stored The contents stored here include the number of times e mail is sent or received E mail error log area lt Bank 10H Addresses 200H to 3FFH gt Descriptions of the e mail send and receive errors are stored when e mail error log is requested Up to the latest 32 e mail error blocks send and receive errors in total can be stored The contents of
127. ansmission request data size 1024 words processing DT261 Transmission processing complete data size i DT265 Transmission error code z 10 21 Example of transparent communication program Transmission processing After the data being transmitted has been written to the transmission buffer of the shared memory the following program is executed Initialization processing and open processing are automatically executed R9010 H F150 READ HO H 360 H2 WRO Jrccceses Allocation of complete signal area RO to R1F Allocation of Always on relay Complete signal area handshake area for F151 WRT HO WR4 H2 H 368 perepea Allocation of request signal area R40 to RSF intemal relay Request signal area Ri H P150 READ HO H 2ED K1 DT 310 a e Reading error code if processing ends in error Open error signal Reading of connection information notified area R100 H AF0 MV K 1024 DT 260 F Setting the send request data size RC R10 R2 H H it d t gt 14 Open comaa sonal mane w Initialization complete signal Writing the send request data size 1 gt P151 WRT HO DT 260 H1 H 25F aa Conditions Initialization complete signal ON Open complete signal ON Send complete signal ON Ri 1 9 R i h by gt Send request signal end complete signal Conditions Initialization complete signal ON O Send request signal fs PRR pierit pessa ron 9 Open complete signal ON Send complete signal ON Transparent iy aa gt f
128. application program to send the transmission again 52H Transmit disable error When using the computer link function Data cannot be transmitted to another node Steps to take Turn the power supply off and then on again If the error still occurs replace the unit If the error does not occur the malfunction may have been caused by noise Check the installation and layout of the transmission line and the usage environment 53H Busy error When using the computer link function A command was received while multiple frames were being processed Steps to take Use the application program to send the transmission again 14 32 PLC application error Error code Error name Steps to take 60H Parameter error When using the computer link function The code used is for an area specification parameter that does not exist or is a code that cannot be used with that command X Y D etc An inappropriate code is being used for the function specification parameter 0 1 2 etc Steps to take Specify using the correct format code 61H Data error When using the computer link function An error occurred indicating that the specification for the contact number area number or the code format used to handle the data BCD HEX etc is excessive insufficient or the wrong range has been specified When using the data transfer function The wrong field has been speci
129. artner node in the MEWTOCOL communication mode Acomputer link enables up to eight simultaneous connections in conjunction with other communication functions using a single ET LAN unit The computer link function and data transmission function can be run on the same connection at the same time 7 1 2 Commands and Functions Available for Use MEWTOCOL COM Commands Command name Code Description Read contact area RC Reads the on off status of relays RCS Specifies only one point RCP Specifies multiple points RCC Specifies a range in word units Write contact area WC Turns relays on and off WCS Specifies only one point WCP Specifies multiple points WCC Specifies a range in word units Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area Write data area WD Writes data to a data area Read timer counter set value area RS Reads the set value for a timer counter Write timer counter set value area WS Writes the set value for a timer counter Read timer counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer counter elapsed value Write timer counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the relay to be monitored Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored Monitoring start MG Monitors a registered relay or data Preset contact area fill command SC Em
130. as not correct User tried to send a response mail whose destination is not specified Check the e mail settings C020H E mail re send error User tried to re send the e mail for the specified number of times but the e mail was not sent successfully Check the SMTP server status through the server administrator Check if the network is not busy If this error occurs the E2 LED on the front panel of the ET LAN unit flashes The contents of the e mail when an error occurred are also stored in the mail error log area For the details of the mail error log refer to lt 11 10 Mail Error Log Mail Log Function gt 12 15 12 3 6 E mail Receive Error transmission These error codes are displayed if an error occurs when receiving e mails If one of these errors occurs the E2 LED on the front panel of the ET LAN unit flashes Code Name Description Step to take Remark C100H POP server User name is not authorized Check the login name If this error error C101H POP server User name is not authorized Check the login name occurs error Password is not authorized Check the password the E2 C102H POP server Information on the number of e Check if the POP server works LED on error mails in the POP server was not normally the front acquired successfully Check if the POP server or Panel of In
131. ata received is less than or equal to the receive request data size 3g Key Point The size of the transparent reception data remaining in the ET LAN unit is stored in the receive unnotified data size area of the shared memory If the receive unnotified data size matches the receive unnotifed data size copy the size of the remaining data is entered After the two have been matched a request for reception of the remaining data should be issued based on this value aS ne Note The size of the receive request data should be specified so that it is less than or equal to the size of the receive buffer x 2 and should be specified in byte units The receive complete signal does not go on until the amount of data received is equal to the receive request data size in the connection information setting area If FFFFH has been specified for the receive request data size direct reception is carried out With direct reception the receive request signal goes on each time a packet is received If the received data exceeds the receive request data size the receive data notified signal remains on even after the receive complete signal has gone off In this case reception data can continue to be read by turning on the receive request signal again The next time data is to be received always check to make sure the receive complete signal is off before executing the reception processing The user is notified of the content of an
132. ata writing data size writing Shared a Wy accessing e Next signal processing oe V S A request aN 6 arvm i f Ladder program processing Transmission complete signal Transmissio error signal unit side Trans ET LAN unit mission processing Processing on ET LAN Execution procedure when sending data The data to be sent in the transmission buffer The size of the data to be sent is set in the transmission request data size parameter in the __ connection information setting area The transmission request signal is turned on 4 When the transmission processing from the ET LAN unit to the communication circuit has been __ successfully completed the transmission complete signal goes on After confirmation has been made that the transmission complete signal is on the transmission _ request signal should be turned off When the transmission request signal has been turned off the transmission complete signal goes off Q If the transmission processing is not successfully completed for some reason the transmission error _ signal goes on To re try the processing first turn the transmission request signal off 2 When the transmission request signal goes off the transmission error signal goes off Always make sure that the transmission error signal has turned off before re sending the data IES ner Note The transmission request data size in the connection information setting area is spe
133. ation and TCP re iransmission timer value settings When TCP IP communication is being carried out data is automatically re sent the specified number of times as shown in the illustration below TCP ULP packet existence duration Values in the are rounded TCP re transmission timer value integer values Number of re sends Example when default settings are used 20AH TCP ULP 000FH 30 seconds 20CH TCP re send timer value 0005H 10 seconds TCP ULP 30 seconds TCP re send timer value 10 seconds N 0 10 20 30 1st sending 2nd sending 3rd sending 4th sending Re send 20 seconds 3 times 10 seconds Note If the value set for the TCP ULP is smaller than that set for the TCP re send timer the data will not be re sent Data will only be sent the first time If UDP IP is being used re sending is not carried out 3 Key Point Always specify the source node IP address and the source node MEWTOCOL station number If these are not specified correctly an error will occur processing will be terminated and the E1 Error LED will light If the default values are to be used for other timer values no values need to be written Initialization information setting area 2 bank 0 Address Name ae ue Setting value and explanation Set value First address in receive buffer The first address of the receive buffer is specified using the absol
134. ation of Device number Setting item Setting for program processing example Initialization DT10 to DT11 IP address 192 9 201 130 processing CO009C982H DT12 Communication function Not used setting between networks DT13 MEWTOCOL station number 01 Open processing DT20 Open method MEWTOCOL communication TCP IP Unpassive open DT21 Source node port No 4097 DT25 Partner node MEWTOCOL 02 station number Program example itso Me 2 Complete signal peep area ROO RIF oie Allocation of handshake rala F151 WRT HO WR4 H2 368 p RS Allocation of request signal area area for internal relays Request signal R40 to R5F APT ret omv HODDI EIQ Joososssnaoncnesonsnssonenerssseicsssornenben IP address 192 9 201 130 intzaton pulse HC009C982 Fo Mv KO DT 12 jj Ena ENE UE Communication between networks not used F0 MV K1 DT 13 Jeeeereesesseseseeesssseseeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeef ee MEWTOCOL station number 01 Initialization processing F151 WRT KO DT 10 K4 H 200 oe Write to shared memory TE l r i Execute initialization processing AS Ero MV H200 pT20 beeen TCP IP Unpassive open Initialization pulse relay MEWTOCOL communication Fomv K 4097 DT 21 spores T bes Source node port No 4097 Fomv K2 DT25 M a EEE oe ee Open processing F151 WRT HO DT 20 K6 H 250 Fp Write to shared memory Initialization complete signal 16 8 Open complete signal ED Execute open processing after initialization processing finishe
135. ator External power supply terminal 100BASE TX 10BASE T connector RJ45 UTP cable 100BASE TX n_i mr 10BASE T hub In an environment with a high noise level a ferrite core should be added near the UTP cable unit 1 4 Communication specifications ltem 100BASE TX Note1 10BASE T Note1 10BASE5 AFP2790 AFP2790 Target model AFP27901 AFP27901 AFP2790 Data transfer 100M bits s 10M bit s 10M bit s Transfer method Base band Base band Base band Max segment length 100 m Note2 100 m Note2 500 m Max distance between nodes 205 m 2 segments 500 m 5 segments 2500 m 5 segments Communication cable for connection UTP Category 5 UTP Category 3 4 and 5 Transceiver cable Max transceiver cable length 50 m Note3 Max number of nodes 100 nodes segment Node spacing Integer multiples of 2 5 m Note1 Switching between 100BASE TX and 10BASE T is done automatically by auto negotiation function Note2 The standards cite 10 m as the maximum but noise resistance measures such as attaching a ferrite core may be necessary in some cases depending on the usage environment Also if the hub is positioned close to a control board we recommend using it at a distance of 10 m or less Note3 The standards cite 50 m as the maximum but noise resistance measures such as attaching a ferrite core may be necessary in some cases depending on the usa
136. ault 0 to FFFFH For To Using the ladder program Nos of the destination addresses Address Nos 1 to 16 for To Cc and Bcc which are registered in the Address 001H Destination address 2 0000H Book by means of Configurator ET can be specified In this For To process bit data is used Address Nos 17 to 32 Example 0027 pesunauon address 0000H When sending e mails to the address Nos 1 and 6 registered in For Ce the Address Book Address Nos 1 to 16 a ee 003H a n address 2 0000H When Bit 0 and Bit 5 of Destination address 1 For To Address Nos 17 to 32 Address 000H in the ladder e mail setting area Bank 10H re F are set to 1 e mail address Nos 1 and 6 registered in the 004H Destination addr ss 1 0000H Address Book are specified as the destination addresses For Bcc Bt FE DCBA987 654321 0 Address Nos 1 to 16 TTT Toop opopoy sf oy eyo oy 005H Destination address 2 0000H Registered No 6 Registered N ip For Bcc Address Nos 17 to 32 To send e mails using the ladder program specify the value other than OH for either Destination address 1 For To or Destination address 2 For To This setting is not required for the destination addresses Cc and Bcc 006H Message No 0000H Default OH Setting value 1 H to the numbers that are registered as e mail messages using Configurator ET The e mail message that you wish to send
137. be as follows H F151 WRT H0 DT n K6 H250 Slot No 0 7 Bank No 00H Destination in which data is stored first address of memory area Writing to shared memory No of words Writing to shared memory First address g Key Point The slot number and bank number to be used by the shared memory writing instructions F151 WRT and P151 PWRT are specified as follows 1514131211109 876543210 et Bank No Slot No 9 5 9 4 Communication Processing for Transparent Communication 9 4 1 Connection Processing Procedure Transmission Reception processing processing Reception notified signal is Data is F151 WRT turned on written to P151 PWRT buffer transmission Reception request data size is specified Transmission request data size is specified i Reception request signal is turned on Transmission request signal is tumed on The ET LAN unit stores Reception the received data from processing the receive buffer in the shared memory The ET LAN unit sends the data in Transmission the transmission buffer Reception completed signal is confirmed Reading F150 READ processing Transmission complete signal is confirmed data from the receive P150 PREAD buffer Transmission processing The ET LAN unit sends data through the communication circuit by writing it to the transmission buffer of the shared memory and then executing the transmission request
138. beds the area of a specified range in a 16 point on off pattern Preset data area fill command SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Remote control RM Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller Abort AB Aborts communication g Key Point Commands and responses used with the ET LAN unit have a dedicated header added to the MEWTOCOL COM communication procedure of the FP series PLC The contents of the specified header vary depending on the communication conditions With the ET LAN unit in addition to ordinary MEWTOCOL an expansion header is also supported that enables single frames of up to 2048 characters to be sent Type of header No of characters that can be sent in 1 frame Max 118 characters lt Max 2048 characters The number of characters that can be sent is restricted by the type of header and the command gt a Reference For detailed information on MEWTOCOL COM please see Chapter 12 7 2 Computer Link Procedure When computer link communication is being carried out on the programmable controller side open processing is used to specify the MEWTOCOL communication mode and to open th
139. been satisfied If this happens this value is notified as being less than the receive request data size E Transparent transmission Stored value 0 Transmission processing has been completed processing complete successfully code Other than 0 Error code when transmission processing ended in an connections 1 to 8 error When transmission processing is carried out again the results are overwritten Error codes are also stored in the error log area F Transparent transmission Stored value Size of the data actually sent to the partner node for the complete data size connections 1 to 8 transmission request in transparent communication in byte units It is not possible for this value to be notified as exceeding the transmission request data size If the connection has been closed by the partner node during the transmission the transmission may be aborted If this happens this value is notified as being less than the transmission request data size If close processing is requested by the source node during the transmission the transmission processing is carried out first and then close processing is carried out Even if the transmission processing ends in an error for some reason transmission processing of the size of data corresponding to this value is completed normally 15 16 Ladder send e mail setting area Shared memory Auto connection status check area i Syst
140. ber of times that e mails have been received successfully is receive complete times stored The value is reset to 0 when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 08BH Number of e mail The number of errors occurred when e mails are received is stored The receive error times errors include the ones occurred in Mail Filter and Request Mail Password check processing The value is reset to 0 when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 08CH to Reserved Used in the system 08FH 15 20 Handshake area Complete signal area Bank 0 Expanded complete signal area Bank 0 Address Description Address Description bit 0 Receive notified signal Connection 1 bitO Receive notified signal Connection 1 bit 1 Receive complete signal Connection 1 bit1 Receive complete signal Connection 1 bit 2 Send complete signal Connection 1 bit 2 Send complete signal Connection 1 bit 3 Send error signal Connection 1 bit 3 Send error signal Connection 1 bit 4 Receive notified signal Connection 2 bit4 Receive notified signal Connection 2 bit 5 Receive complete signal Connection 2 bit 5 Receive complete signal Connection 2 bit 6 Receive complete signal Connection 2 bit 6 Receive complete signal Co
141. bit E Open request signal Connection 8 bit E Transmission request signal Connection 8 bit F bit F 36AH bit 0 E mail receive complete signal bit 1 bit 2 E mail transmission request signal bit 3 bit 4 E mail log notified request signal bit 5 E mail error log notified request signal bit 6 to Reserved bit F The same signal for example the connection 1 Receive request signal 368H bit 0 and 36CH bit 0 can be used in both the signal complete area and the expanded complete signal area It does not matter which signal is used in which area If the Error LED flashing out signal 368H bit E is turned on the flashing LEDs for E1 and E2 go out Also while the Error LED flashing out signal 368H bit E is on the LEDs for E1 and E2 will not flash even if a recoverable error or a warning error occurs However these functions are not affected by error log processing so the error contents remain in the log Handshake using the shared memory When using the shared memory to carry out the handshake internal relays should be allocated to teach of the signal areas as shown in the program below Program example R9010 H F150 READ HO H360 H2 WR10 F150 READ HO H364 H2 WR12 F150 READ HO H366 H1 WR14 F151 WRT HO WR20 H2 H368 F151 WRT HO WR22 H2 H36C The complete signal area Bank 0 Addresses 360H 361H is reflected in WR10 and WR11 The expanded complete s
142. ceive request data size data size If the connection has been closed receive processing may end in connections 1 to 8 some cases even if the receive request data size has not been satisfied If this happens this value is notified as being less than the receive request data size Stored value 0 Transmission processing has been completed Transparent successfully transmission Other than 0 Error code when transmission processing ended in an E processing error complete code If transmission processing is carried out again the results are connections 1 to 8 overwritten Error codes are also stored in the error log area Stored value Size of the data actually sent to the partner node for the transmission request in transparent communication in byte units It is not possible for this value to be notified as exceeding the transmission request data size If the connection has been closed by the partner node during the Transparent transmission the transmission may be aborted If this happens this transmission iva ae F value is notified as being less than the transmission request data complete data size connections 1 to 8 size If close processing is requested by the source node during the transmission the transmission processing is carried out first and then close processing is carried out Even if the transmission processing ends in an error for some reason transmission processing of the size of data
143. cessful Contact code ___Contact__ Notation External output Y Internal relayR R Link relay L Source Error code x10 x 10 x16 x160 SD Preset data area fill command This writes the same contents to the data area of the specified range Command Starting word No Ending word No 5 characters 5 characters x101 x100 x104 x103 x102 x101 x100 Word preset pattern 4 characters x161 x160 x163 BCC CR x160 x16 x161 T ae Normal response Preset successful lower word higher word Data code ___Data__ Notation Data register DT_ D Link data register LD File register FL Error code x161 x160 14 20 RT Read the status of PLC This reads information such as error codes if an error occurs in the programmable controller specifications Command T T jis Destination BCC or R T Cr lt x101 x100 x161 x160 Normal response Read successful s Model code Version Program O paranon ource T 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters x101 x100 x161 x160 x161 160 x161 x160 x161 x16 T T T T T T Link information i for system Error flag Self diagnostic error No BCC 2 characters 2 characters 4 characters CR x161 x160 x161 x160 x161 x169 x163 x16 x161 160 L 1 A lower word higher word Error response Read error Source Error
144. cessing essen Initialization request ae Error code read fi processing ends in error reading of initialization information notified area sone Selects transparent communication TCP IP Active sone Source node port No 8000 eres Partner node IP address 192 168 1 2 COA80102H masse Partner node port No 8000 lOpen processing seen Writing to communication information setting area Wace Open request for connection 1 after initialization processing has been completed Error code read if processing ends in error reading of connection information notified area 9 17 9 5 2 Sample Program lt Transmission Processing and Reception Processing gt Program contents In this sample program the ET LAN has been installed in slot no 0 and transmission or reception of data is being carried out after initialization to open processing has been completed Internal relay allocation ET LAN unit Network l l l l l l L Message reception and message transmission of processing Classification Device number Devices used in program example R1 Receive complete signal R2 Transmission complete signal Complete signal area RO to R1F R3 Transmission error signal RC Initialization complete signal R10 Open complete signal l SEET ional Request signal area R40 to R5F R40 Initialization request signa R42 Transmission request signal Data register allocation C acano Device number Setting item Setting fo
145. cified in byte units and should be set such that the transmission request data size is less than or equal to the transmission buffer size x 2 The next time data is to be sent always check to make sure the transmission complete signal is off b before executing the transmission processing The user is notified of the content of an error by means of a transmission processing end code and an error log 9 4 3 Procedure for Reception Processing Reception processing timing chart When the size of the data received is less than or equal to the reception request data size Reception request Reception Shared data size writing data reading memory accessing Ladder program processing Reception processing Receive complete signal Receive notified signal Processing on ET LAN unit side ET LAN unit processing Reception request Reception Shared data size writing data reading memory accessing Ladder program processing Reception processing r 4 i a ener 5 8 If receive notified signal is Receive jo oran proceeds i ain to reception request complete 7 ag eq signal Processing on ET LAN unit side a p ET LAN unit Reception riting to K writi processing processing shared memory 9 10 Procedure when receiving data When the size of the data received is less than or equal to the reception request data size the following pr
146. ck Log block lt Latest log block gt Latest log block Latest log block area Log block reading processing area 388H Connection No See note 390H Connection No See note 39H 30H Pointer seting block 392H to Reserved Latest log block 397H Used by the system 38AH to Reserved 38FH Used by the system Note If no connection number is specified 398H to Same configuration as 0 will be set 39FH 390H to 397H 3A0H to Same configuration as 3A7H 390H to 397H 3A8H to Same configuration as 3AFH 390H to 397H 3BOH to Same configuration as 3B7H 390H to 397H 3B8H to Same configuration as 3BFH 390H to 397H 3COH to Same configuration as 3C7H 390H to 397H 3C8H to Same configuration as 3CFH 390H to 397H 3DOH to Same configuration as 3D7H 390H to 397H 3D8H to Same configuration as 3DFH 390H to 397H 3E0H to Same configuration as 3E7H 390H to 397H 3E8H to Same configuration as 3EFH 390H to 397H 3FOH to Same configuration as 3F7H 390H to 397H 3F8H to Same configuration as 3FFH 390H to 397H Older log block Note If no connection number is specified 0 will be set 12 3 12 1 2 Contents of Error Log Area Error log area bank 0 Address Name Explanation Set value Default value 0004H The recorded error differs depending on the set value Set value 0 1 2 3 4 System error O O O O
147. cksum value was incorrect ULP timeout error This notifies the user that when a TCP packet was re sent a normal response was not returned by the destination within a given period of time 12 14 12 3 5 E mail Send Error These error codes are displayed if an error occurs when sending e mails If one of these errors occurs the E2 LED on the front panel of the ET LAN unit flashes CO00H SMTP server error E mail service of the SMTP server does not work The server was shut down when e mail was being transferred Code Name Description Step to take Remark Check the e mail settings Check the SMTP server status through the server administrator C001H SMTP server error The requested command was not executed The specified command was not executed due to the local error The requested command was not executed Cause of the error Memory shortage of the file system Syntax error of the command Parameter error of the specified command The specified command was not executed because the destination address did not have the e mail box The specified command was not executed due to the file system problem E mail was not transferred successfully Check the SMTP server status through the server administrator Check if the network is not busy Check the e mail settings C002H SMTP server error The SMTP server received an unsupported com
148. communication Receiving buffer starting address for 218 transparent communication 3800k J The first address in each buffer 219H Receiving buffer size for transparent 0400H should be specified using 2800H to Connection communication 3FFFH word address 2AH 3 Transmission buffer starting address 3C00H 7 For the details of each setting refer for transparent communication to the above addresses 210H to 21BH Transmission buffer size for 0400H 213H transparent communication 21CH Receiving buffer starting address for FFFFH transparent communication Receiving buffer size for transparent 21DH Connection communication 0000H 2 EH 4 Transmission buffer starting address FFFFH for transparent communication 21FH Transmission buffer size for 0000H transparent communication 5 9 Default Address Name Values 220H Receiving buffer starting address for EFFFH transparent communication 2 1H Receiving buffer size for transparent 0000H Connection communication 222H 5 Transmission buffer starting address FFFFH for transparent communication 223H Transmission buffer size for 0000H transparent communication 224H Receiving buffer starting address for FFFFH transparent communication 225H Receiving buffer size for transparent 0000H Connection communication 226H 6 Transmission buffer starting address FFFFH for transparent c
149. complete signal bit 5 Receive error signal Connection 6 bit 6 bit 6 Receive error signal Connection 7 to Reserved bit 7 Receive error signal Connection 8 bit F bit 8 No communication time out signal Connection 1 bit 9 No communication time out signal Connection 2 bit A No communication time out signal Connection 3 bit B No communication time out signal Connection 4 bit C No communication time out signal Connection 5 bit D No communication time out signal Connection 6 bit E No communication time out signal Connection 7 bit F No communication time out signal Connection 8 a MD Note The same signal for example the connection 1 Receive notified signal 360H bit 0 and 364H bit 0 can be used in both the signal complete area and the expanded complete signal area It does not matter which signal is used in which area 4 10 Complete signal area bank 0 Expanded complete signal area bank 0 cS ne Note Address Description Address Description 368H bit 0 Receive request signal Connection 1 36CH bit 0 Receive request signal Connection 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 2 Transmission request signal Connection 1 bit 2 Transmission request signal Connection 1 bit3 bit 3 bit 4 Receive
150. ction transmission line connection and the status of the partner node 12 10 Code Name Description Step to take Remark 8041H 8042H 8043H 8044H 8045H 8046H 8047H MEWTOCOL reception error A packet containing an error in the MEWTOCOL communication format was received A packet with a hierarchy level LEVEL of 8 or higher was received A packet containing an error in the MEWTOCOL communication format was received A packet with a hierarchy depth DEPTH of 8 or higher was received A packet containing an error in the MEWTOCOL communication format was received A packet with a message data size of 2 049 or more was received A packet containing an error in the MEWTOCOL communication format was received A packet was received that specified a value other than 10H 11H 20H or 21H as the first value The received MEWTOCOL communication was not directed to the source node MEWTOCOL station number The destination station number of the received MEWTOCOL communication was not a value of 1 to 64 A frame was received for a partner node MEWTOCOL station number for which no connection has been opened Correct the setting for the node to which the MEWTOCOL communication was sent format content MEWTOCOL station number etc The connection will be forcibly closed 12 11 12 3 2 System Error This
151. curs e mail error log information is transferred to the e mail error log area Note The e mail request signal is effective only for handshake using the shared memory Internal relay allocation Classification Device No Device used in the program example E mail complete R20 to R2F R24 E mail log notified complete signal signal area R25 E mail error log notified complete signal E mail request R40 to R4F R44 E mail log notified request signal signal area R45 E mail error log notified request signal Program example R3010 All f e mail compl H F150 READ HO H382 Ho W2 a ocation of e mail complete Allocation of signal area R20 to R2F handshake F151 ERT gt HO gt R4 HI H 364 peee Allocation of request signal area for R9010 area R40 to R4F internal relay FO MY H4 DT 50 l aaea ea a Log mode 4 Writing the read settings F151 ERT gt HO gt DT 50 gt K4 gt H 380 in the error log area R303 Ly E mail log notified j request ON R304 R45 E mail error log notified request ON Rt After transferring the e mail error log information and e mail log information using the ladder program the transferred contents can be checked using the Shared Memory readout menu in the programming tool Reference Shared memory readout menu in the programming tool 1 On the Tools menu select Display PLC Shared memory This reads the PLC 2 Specify
152. d times The value is reset to O when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 089H Number of e mail Stored value 0 FFFFH receive check error The number of times that the e mail check is not completed successfully is stored The value is reset to 0 when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed O8AH Number of e mail Stored value 0 FFFFH receive complete The number of times that e mails are received is stored times The value is reset to 0 when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 08BH Number of e mail Stored value 0 FFFFH receive error The number of errors occurred when e mails are received is stored The errors include the ones occurred in Mail Filter and Request Mail Password check processing The value is reset to O when the initialization processing is executed or the e mail setting is changed 08CH Reserved Used in the system 08FH 11 27 11 10 5 Sample Program Program contents The sample program is for an ET LAN unit installed in Slot No 0 The program processing is as shown below When the internal relay signal R303 is turned ON e mail send log information is transferred to the e mail send log area and e mail receive log information is transferred to the e mail receive log area When the internal relay signal R304 is turned ON and the e mail receive error oc
153. d only if TCP IP was specified as the communication method Active open Connection is actively established Fullpassive open System waits for reception from a specified partner node in order to establish a connection Unpassive open System waits for reception from an unspecified partner node in order to establish a connection c Application in which connection is used If using computer linking or data transfer set 0 MEWTOCOL communication If using transparent communication set 1 Transparent communication D neds Set value TCP or UDP communication process port number 1 p en 0000H Set any port number other than OH a value of 8000 1F40 connections or higher is recommended 1 to 8 Partner node Set value Partner node IP address IP address L When using TCP Fullpassive and Active open 2 0000H ae connections Specify an IP address for the partner node that is in the same 1 to 8 class and is other than OH or FFFFFFFFH Partner node When using UDP IP address Use an IP address for the partner node that is in the same 3 H 0000H class and is other than OH connections When using TCP Unpassive open 1 to 8 No address needs to be specified Partner node Set value Partner node port number port No Set any port number other than OH a value of 8000 1F40 4 F 0000H connections or higher is recommended 1 to 8 This is not necessary when using TCP Unpassive open
154. dder program the following settings are required When the initialization processing is set using the Configurator ET the initialization processing is automatically conducted without setting the initialization processing using the ladder program Seiting item Setting method Internal relay allocation Ladder program Initialization processing Configurator ET Open processing Ladder program Data transfer Ladder program Setting using the setup tool Configurator ET Setting the connection using the ladder program To set the open processing using the ladder program confirm that a check mark is placed in The connection 1 to 8 are set by ladder program check box Fie Uni Settes Mail Settings View Onine Option Heb os Pasi ES Tonvectent a Af a Tin Owe eet by Sat The connection 1 to 8 are set by ladder proeram gt Ptice Information Communication method w e w Open method n the TOPAP ke Conmnikation iinction amoa Soren ort runba as Destnaten IF adtere fu Destination port number SS Destingien MEWTOOOL station number ay Destination Ethernet addvess fon na Unuead connection cut time minutes Revepen tenes b Connection settines Fala NUM Setting the initialization processing using the Configurator ET Classification Setting item Description Initialization Initialization Source node Source node IP address 192 168 1
155. e ET LAN unit 1 9 1 2 3 Self Diagnosis Functions Hardware and communication status check function The ET LAN unit is equipped with a self diagnosis function that monitors the hardware CPU unit and memory and the communication status during operation You can check the self diagnosis results using the LEDs on the unit or by checking the contents of error log area in the shared memory Test mode operation function The ET LAN unit is reequipped with a test mode operation function for checking the hardware memory check and communications check and for performing internal and external loop back tests You can check the results of the test mode operation function using the LEDs on the unit or by checking the contents of error log area in the shared memory Error log function The ET LAN unit is equipped with an error log function that records hardware and communications faults in the order that they occur You can read out the contents of error log from the error log area in the shared memory 1 3 Restrictions on Units Combination 1 3 1 Restrictions on Current Consumption The internal current consumption at 5 V DC power supply for the FP2 ET LAN unit is 670 mA When the system is configured the other units being used should be taken into consideration and a power supply unit with a sufficient capacity should be used Name Part number Model number Current consumption at 5 V DC FP2 ET LAN unit FP2 E
156. e and to open the connection with the partner node after initialization processing for the ET LAN unit has been carried out Procedure for transferring ET LAN unit data Initialization processing separately for each unit See Chapter 5 Initialization Processing and Termination Processing Open processing separately for each See Chapter 6 Open Processing and Close Processing connection Communication can be moto nn MMMM 4 carried out through up to Data transfer instructions SEND and RECV are executed through ot l 8 connections in 12 ladder program in the source mode programmable controller If combination with data the partner node is the programmable controller there is no need transfer and transparent to create a program for communication with the partner node communication ae ee a ee ee Close processing separately for each See Chapter 6 Open Processing and Close Processing onnecvion Termination processing separately for each unit See Chapter 5 Initialization Processing and Termination Processing Initialization Open Close Termination processing processing processing processing processing Initialization request signal Initialization complete signal Open request signal separately for each connection Open complete signal separately for each connection Note When the initialization complete signal is on any number of open processing a
157. e connection with the partner node after initialization processing for the unit has been carried out After a connection has been opened with the partner node computer there is no need to run a communication program on the programmable controller side Instead the programmable controller receives command messages from the computer and automatically sends response messages back Procedure for setting up an ET LAN unit computer link Initialization processing separately for each unit Open processing separately for each See Chapter 6 Open Processing and Close Processing connection Communication can be eee se ec ses ee A SE EA S S S 1 carried out through up to o There is no need to run a communication program on 8 connections in combination with data the programmable controller side j a e a a a e i a a a a S a i a i transfer and transparent communication Close processing separately for each See Chapter 6 Open Processing and Close Processing connection Termination processing separately for each unit The relationship between open processing and close processing Initialization Open Close Termination processing processing processing processing processing Initialization request signal Initialization complete signal Open request signal separately for each connection Open complete signal separately for each connection Note When the initializati
158. e port is being re opened when TCP close processing is done by the source node 20EH IP assembling 000FH Setting time Set value 1 to FFFFH x 2 seconds timer value 30 seconds This specifies the time waited for the next portion of data when data split by the IP is being received 20FH Reserved When any value is written it should be 0000H Used by the system 15 6 Address Name Default Set value and explanation 210H Receiving buffer starting address for 2800H Set value First address in receive buffer transparent communication The first address of the receive buffer is specified Connection 1 using the absolute address word address of the shared memory when transparent communication is being carried out among the various connections 0000H is set when this is not being used 211H Receiving buffer size for transparent 0400H Set value Size of receive buffer communication Connection 1 The size of the receive buffer is specified in word units when transparent communication is being carried out among the various connections FFFFH is set when this is not being used 212H Transmission buffer starting address 2C00H Set value First address in transmission buffer for transparent communication The first address of the transmission buffer is Connection 1 specified using the absolute address word address of the shared memory when transparent comm
159. eceive request emal Mm RST A q processing E mail r ceive complete signal E mail receive error signal signal OFF R21 E mail receive error signal 11 21 11 10 E mail Error Log and E mail Log Functions 11 10 1 What are the e mail error logs and e mail log functions The ET LAN unit is equipped with a log buffer and an error log buffer The log buffer records the communication information when sending receiving e mails The error log buffer records the communication error information when sending receiving e mails To read the contents of the log buffer read the e mail error log area e mail send log area and e mail receive log area in the shared memory using the shared memory access The e mail send receive status e g the number of times that e mails are sent and received can be checked by reading the e mail status area of the ET LAN unit Whenever e mail send receive processing is completed the e mail status is updated Configuration of the error log area Bank 10H Address 0200H O3FFH Error log block 4 _ Latest error log block Error log block Error log block Shared memory Error log block Ladder send e mail Error log block setting area Auto connection status check area System connection information notified User system area area 2 2 K words Error log block Bank 11H Address 0000H 01FFH Send log block lt Latest error log block Send log block Send log bloc
160. ecifying Bcc 9 Lower 16 bits Nos 17 32 A F Reserved Reserved Used in the system E mail address No set for To is stored using the bit data E mail address No set for Cc is stored using the bit data E mail address No set for Bcc is stored using the bit data Contents of the receive log block Receive log blocks can be registered in the e mail receive log area A newer e mail receive log is continuously registered in the starting receive log block When the number of the receive log block exceeds 32 the older log that is stored in the e mail receive log area s last block is overwritten Receive log blocks Bank 11H Address 0200H 03FFH Offset address Name Description o L Date Min 0 H Date Time a 1 L Date Day Date and time when e mail is received 1 H Date Month 2 E From Notet E mail source address ASCII 26 characters of the received e mail F Error code ic Note 1 When the e mail source address is indicated in more than 27 characters the characters later than the 27 character are omitted 11 25 Time chart for reading e mail logs Reading of e mail Shared error log memory accessing E mail error log request signal Ladder program processing E mail error log complete signal ET LAN unit b pil to V snar processing memory Procedure to read e mai
161. ect port for UDP number A003H Transmission This error indicates that a Carry out the transmission error notification was received from processing again the transmission section of the unit A004H IP processing Error notification was received Carry out the transmission 12 13 Code Name Description Step to take Remark AOO5H TCP IP processing Error notification was received Carry out the transmission If any of error from the TCP processing again these errors No connection established occur the This notification is received if an If communication cannot be E1 LED on attempt was made to request performed after the the front transmission or reception occurrence of error use the panel of the without a TCP connection being reset function or turn the ET LAN unit established power off and on again flashes Connection closed This notification is received if an attempt was made to request transmission or reception while a close request was in process after the connection was established Connection already established This notification is received if a new open request is made with the same source node port number partner node port number and partner node IP address after a connection has been established Internal resource error Successive TCP transmission requests are made without a response being returned Checksum error This notifies the user that when a TCP packet was received the che
162. eeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 9 1 An Overview of the Transparent Communication Function csssccsssseeeeees 9 2 9 1 1 What is the Transparent Communication FUNCTION c ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 9 2 9 2 Transparent Communication ProCedures sccsseccseceeeeseeeseeeseseeeeeeeeeeesesesseesesneneeseees 9 3 9 3 Settings on the PLC Side ea a shee eaa atara sete veces eaa sh a eaea aaa Eaa ee Eae ao aaa aapea 9 4 9 3 1 Connection Information Settings cccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeeseeeeeaeeeeneeeed 9 4 9 3 2 Writing to the Shared Memory cccccccceeceeceeeeeeaeeeeneeceeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeneeee 9 5 9 4 Communication Processing for Transparent Communication ssscsseeeeeeeees 9 6 9 4 1 Connection Processing Procedure cccecceceeeceeeeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeteaeeteeeees 9 6 9 4 2 Procedure for Transmission Processing ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeseaas 9 8 9 4 3 Procedure for Reception Processing ccccceeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeneaas 9 10 9 4 4 Handshake Signal and Data Area ccccccccceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaaeseeeeeeaas 9 13 9 5 Sample Prograim cccacehcesevsneccdennctcetcevent dances ceutevetec genech aaeeea aa a Sakae aada aikeenaan aeaea 9 16 9 5 1 Sample Program lt lnitialization to Open gt ceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeesaeeseeeeeeea
163. eeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeeneeeeseeeseseaeenseeeeees 6 12 7 Computer Link Function siccisieccceccesccccetssnencedecnecsneeenanencuacceccdsaneeaaaucnaec 7 1 7 1 An Overview of the Computer Link Function cc cceeseceseseeeseeeeeseeeeeneeesneeeeseeneeeeees 7 2 7 1 1 What is the Computer Link Function 0 ecccceececeeeeeeee eter ee eeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeetaaeeteneeeea 7 2 7 1 2 Commands and Functions Available for US 0 cccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeneeeee 7 3 7 2 Computer Link Procedure 0cccscccseseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeesneeenseeeeneeeeseaesaseeeenseaeeeeeeeseaeensneneneeees 7 5 7 3 Settings on the PLC Side ccccsecsssceseeeeeseeeeeneseseeeenseeeeseeeeseaeseseeeenseaeeeeesessaeenseenenenees 7 6 7 3 1 Connection Information Settings cccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeneneeeed 7 6 7 3 2 Writing to the Shared Memory ccccccseceeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaeseeeeeseaeeetaeeeeneeee 7 8 3 3 Sample Program retin e eiea ania ahah el aha el ede ada ad 7 9 7 4 Command Communication on the Computer Side ccssscseeceeseeeseteeeseeeeneeeeeeees 7 11 7 4 1 Communication Data Format 1 ccc ccceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseneeseeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeeeaes 7 11 7 4 2 Communication Data Format 2 ccc cccecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeeeaes 7 14 8 Data Transfer FUN CHOON isiicciccciscccsincrenarancveccranawencnenavencvanavencuenave
164. eeeeeeeeteeeees 2 4 3 Connection for LAN Cable js iics scesscccctecnts ateinteastecnteagteisteadiessteaemiwes 3 1 3 1 Precautions Concerning Installation 0 cccesccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeneeeeeeeeseseaeseseenenseees 3 2 3 2 Connection for LAN Cable u cccccsssscssseseeeceecsssseeseeueeenansaseseseeeauanausaeeseseenaeauansseesnsnsnas 3 4 3 2 1 100BASE TX and 10BASE T Connections 0 cccecceeceeceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeceeeesaeeseneeesaees 3 4 3 22 T0BASE5 AU CONNECTIONS sasieeaceeetaeccasebeavecestavzel Sairaan an aana rataa ae aa ia tratita iaat 3 5 3 3 Test M derris ee ee eee 3 6 3 3 1 Types and Contents of Test Modes cccccecceeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeseneeesaeeetaeeeeneeeeaes 3 6 3 3 2 Running Test MOTOS eae TS ET OSN 3 7 4 Confirming the Design Contents ccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 4 1 Address Confirmation c eia aaar a aa aeaaaee aaa Sa cccecestdh cibcteeccececndecdacdhssaececeeed teed 4 2 4 4 1 P2Address Contirationy siieu aeaeaie tanaoa ae aeaea Aan aS TAEA Aia Sie 4 2 4 1 2 MEWTOCOL Station Number Confirmation ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeeeaees 4 2 B21 OANO CATIONS wees occu earr aa eaa raaa paaa ose a en raaa Saa ora st erae aE cece suck cvscsusucucdceceesstes cueecuetesceed 4 3 4 2 1 Confirmation of 1 O Allocations ccececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceaeeesaeeseneeesaeeesaeeseneeeeaees 4 3 4 2 2 Confirmation of Route NUMberSs
165. elay Complete signal area F150 READ gt HO gt H364 gt H2 gt W2 Complete signal area Allocation of handshake area for internal relays As the auto initialization processing is set initialization processing using the ladder program is unnecessary x Programming is not required Initialization processing p150 gt HO Initialization error signal As the auto open processing is set open processing using the ladder program is unnecessary x Programming is not required Open processing I piso aero HO gt H 20 Kt gt oF 310 Open error signal R9013 Por Oy gt H 1050003 gt Oa Initialization pulse relay R 4 R10 SEND RECV Open complete signal Initialization complete signal P145 SEND gt oa gt OF 100 oro gt amp 1000 Data transfer 10 19 Transparent communication sample program Program contents In this sample program the ET LAN has been installed in Slot No 0 In this program the contents of the transmission buffer 1K words for Connection 1 are sent to the transmission side and received on the reception side using the transparent communication Transmission side Reception side i Poms Transmit gt i 4 I gt Z l uM A 7 Oo I lt Receive 1 Lo Y I N ET LAN unit Transmitting and receiving messages When the auto connection function is available use the setup tool Configurator
166. em connection infor Bank 10H mation notified area Address 000H to 03FH Initialization information Bank 10H notified area Address 040H to 04FH User system area 2 E mail status area Bank 10H 2 K words Address 050H to 07FH r Bank 10H Emal eror ag eves Address 080H to 08FH E mail send log area E mail receive log area Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Ladder send e mail setting area Bank 10H Address Name Default Set value Explanation 000H Destination address 1 0000H Default 0 to FFFFH For To Nos of the destination addresses for To Cc and Bcc Address Nos 1 to 17 which are registered in the Address Book by means of 001H Destination address 2 0000H Configurator ET can be specified In this process bit data is For To used Address Nos 17 to 32 Example 002H panicled n address1 0000H When sending e mails to the Nos 1 and 6 addresses registered Address Nos 1 to 16 in the Address Book 003H Destination address 2 0000H Destination address 1 For To Address 000H For Cc Bt FEDCBA9876543210 Address Nos 17 to 32 olee eoio o e ojoojeloloi 004H EE address 1 0000H Registered No 6 Registered No 1 Address Nos 1 to 16 To send e mails using the ladder program set the default to 005H Destination address 2 0000H the value other than OH for either Destination address
167. ent communication should be specified using 21DH Receiving buffer size for transparent 0000H 2800H to 3FFFH word communication address 21EH Transmission buffer starting address FFFFH See address 210H to 213H for transparent communication 21FH Transmission buffer size for 0000H transparent communication 220H Connection 5 Receiving buffer starting address for FFFFH transparent communication 221H Receiving buffer size for transparent 0000H communication 222H Transmission buffer starting address FFFFH for transparent communication 223H Transmission buffer size for 0000H transparent communication 224H Connection 6 Receiving buffer starting address for FFFFH transparent communication 225H Receiving buffer size for transparent 0000H communication 226H Transmission buffer starting address FFFFH for transparent communication 227H Transmission buffer size for 0000H transparent communication 228H Connection 7 Receiving buffer starting address for FFFFH transparent communication 229H Receiving buffer size for transparent 0000H communication 22AH Transmission buffer starting address FFFFH for transparent communication 22BH Transmission buffer size for 0000H transparent communication 22CH Connection 8 Receiving buffer starting address for FFFFH transparent communication 22DH Receiving buffer size for transparent 0000H communication 22EH Transmission buffer starting address FFFFH for transparent communication 22FH Transmission buf
168. entered until initialization processing has been completed successfully 5 17 Address 2D8H 2D9H 2DAH 2DBH 2DCH 2DDH 2DEH 2DFH Name Reserved Used by the system Setting value and explanation 5 18 5 4 Sample Program This sample program assumes that the ET LAN has been installed in slot no 0 Program example R9010 H F150 READ HO H360 H2 WRO Allocation of complete signal area Allocation of Always on relay Complete RO to R1F handshake signal area area for F151 WRT HO WR4 H2 H368 Allocation of request signal area internal relays Request R40 to R5F y R9013 signal area HH F1 Dmv H COA80101 DT10 Fssmuf Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 Initialization pulse relay C0A80101H Fo mv _ HO DT AQ Jprvssesseseemeeesneeefanee Communication between networks not used Fo Mv H1 DT13 Jh Source node MEWTOCOL station no R9014 01 P151 PWRT HO DT10 K4 H200 t Writing to initialization information Initialization pulse relay setting area Initialization processing R9014 RD R4C Wiietzation enor signal p Initialization request Initialization pulse relay Initialization request signal RD HHF150 READ HO H2D0 K1 DT300 Error code read if processing ends in Initialization error signal error reading of initialization information notified area
169. equest data size When the connection has been closed receive processing may end in some cases even if the receive request data size has not been satisfied If this happens the value is notified as being less than the receive request data size E Transparent Stored value transmission 0 Transmission processing has been completed successfully processing complete Other than 0 Error code when transmission processing ended in an error code Results are overwritten when transmission processing is conducted again Connections 1 to 8 Error codes are also stored in the error log area F Transparent transmission complete data size Connections 1 to 8 Stored value Size of the data actually sent to the destination node for the transmission request in transparent communication in byte units It is not possible for this value to be notified as exceeding the transmission request data size When the connection has been closed by the destination node during the transmission the transmission may be aborted If this happens this value is notified as being less than the transmission request data size When close processing is requested by the source node during the transmission the transmission processing is conducted first and then close processing is conducted Even if the transmission processing ends in an error for some reason transmission processing of the data of the size corresponding to the value is completed
170. er 2 AD BCC AD BCC amp CR 7 BCC amp CR Programmable controller AD 2 Host computer Ap lecc amp Ce lt Programmable AD controller lt 4 When multiple frame command is aborted before being completed BCC Cr 4 Abort command pes Host computer aD BCC Cr aD Bcc amp CR Programmable controller lt Note When a transmission is split into several frames and sent after one frame has been sent the next frame cannot be sent until a transmission request message 1 in the sample communication timing chart has been received from the partner side If multiple frames are being received a transmission request message 2 in the sample communication timing chart should be sent to the partner side so that the next frame can be received BCC amp Cr AD BCC amp Cr 14 7 14 1 3 List of MEWTOCOL COM Commands Table of command Command name Code Description Read contact area RC Reads the on and off status of contacts RCS Specifies only one point RCP Specifies multiple contacts RCC Specifies a range in word units Write contact area WC Turns contacts on and off WCS Specifies only one point WCP Specifies multiple contacts WCC Specifies a range in word
171. er signature 4 editable ignaturs Fixed signature 1 Sacurity tor receiving e mails A filter can be set for the incoming e mail using a keyword y g Sender s e mail address domain name and Subject Note1 This size includes the e mail main message address book data and signature data Note2 When sending and receiving e mails communication with the e mail server is internally conducted Therefore connection setting for communication with the e mail server is not necessary E mail settings using the setup tool Configurator ET are required Note3 E mails that are sent and received do not support the encrypted data and compressed data ET LAN e mail receive function is supported only by POP Note The e mail function is only available with Ver 2 00 or later of ET LAN unit 11 2 11 2 Precautions When Using the E mail Function Check items before using the e mail function Q1 Is ET LAN unit installed in the network environment that can be connected with the e mail server YES Proceed to Q2 NO E mails cannot be sent and received without using the e mail server Not clear Check with your network administrator Q2 Do you have the IP address used in the network that is connected with the ET LAN YES Proceed to Q3 NO E mails cannot be sent and received without the IP address Not clear Check with your network administrator Q3 Do you use the e mail setup tool Configurator ET YES want t
172. error code notifies the user if a critical system error has occurred If this error occurs the E2 LED on the front panel of the ET LAN unit lights Code Name Description Step to take Remark 9001H System error A watchdog error occurred the The unit has run away These are system during normal ALARM LED is lighted Turn the power supply off errors that can operation and then on again occur during 9002H The unit transmission section Turn the power supply off normal operation If sent notification of a memory and then on again one of these errors access error occurs the E2 LED 9003H There is no longer enough on the front panel buffer space available in the of the ET LAN unit application processing lights 9004H There is no longer enough buffer space available in the protocol processing 9005H The EEPROM Ethernet address cannot be read successfully 9006H The CPU unit has run away or Problem with the CPU unit a version of the CPU unit is Check the contents of being used that is not lt ALARM LED gt supported by the ET LAN unit Check the CPU unit so the CPU unit cannot be version recognized 9010H Test mode An error was discovered during Turn the power supply off These are errors execution results the ROM test and then on again that occur during 9011H An error was discovered during test operation If the RAM test one of these errors 9012H An
173. escceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeaeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeee 12 4 12 2 Reading the Error LOGQ cs sccccsseeeceeesneeeeeesneeeeeesneeseessneeeeensneeseessneesesssneeseessneeeeeesnaes 12 5 12 2 1 Procedure for Reading the Error LOQ ccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeneaeees 12 5 12 2 2 Sample Program 2 223 sac he sath ia ie tea ee eae ee 12 6 12 3 Error Code Contents aieeaa aende iaaiaee naaa Oa daea naat da cenean ieina a 12 7 123 1 Access EnG maeaea era chennai na EEN a N EEE NES eaa 12 7 12 3 2 Systeni Erropen paa a a ee i aa a i ee eta geet 12 12 12 33 Warning Error aeania aia a ened Ea NE E NEN 12 12 12 3 4 Recovery Possible Error ecccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseenaeeeeseaaes 12 13 12 3 5 E mail Send Errotan a aa aaea a a a i aaaea daiak 12 15 12 3 6 E mail Receive Error tranSMmiSSion cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeenaeeeeneaaes 12 16 12 3 7 MEWTOGOL ETON aian ties hive ee etait ge dealin ease a daaa 12 17 12 3 8 Hardware Errorees ccc ceca eddies eee edness VE ae E 12 17 12 3 9 Auto Connection Error ccccceccceeeeeceececeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaesseneeseeeesaesseaeesenees 12 18 13 Troubleshooting sisses aeaa aaea a aaaea 13 1 13 1 Operation If an Error OCCUIS ission naaede enan aent ae eaaet pe taet tatoa a surasi iiaeaa iaat 13 2 13 1 1 Operation If the ALARM LED on the ET LAN Unit Lights seeseeeeeee eeen 13 2 13
174. ess H 245H Network subnetwork address L 246H Network subnetwork address H 247H Foures Router IP address L aor 248H Router IP address H 249H 24AH ae Reserved Used by the system If any value is written to these it should be 0000H 24DH 24EH 24FH 5 14 Router 1 to 5 and default router gateway settings The ET LAN unit can communicate not only with the destination nodes on the source network but also with destination nodes on other networks through the router There are two types of communication that can be carried out with destination nodes on other networks as described below 1 Communication with destination nodes on adjacent networks registered in advance Other networks 1 2 3 in the diagram 2 Communication with destination nodes on any other desired network Other networks A B C in the diagram With the ET LAN unit with regard to the routers on the source network through which the type of communication described in 1 is handled there may be up to five of these routers the IP address es of the router s and the network sub network address es of the adjacent network s connected through the router s are registered in the routing information The router on the source network through which the communication described in 2 is handled is called the default router gateway and the IP address for this default router is also registered in the routing information Router IP add
175. est signal Connection 2 bit 2 Transmission complete signal Connection 5 bit 3 bit 3 Transmission error signal Connection 5 bit 4 Open request signal Connection 3 bit 4 Receive notified signal Connection 6 bit 5 bit 5 Receive complete signal Connection 6 bit 6 Open request signal Connection 4 bit 6 Transmission complete signal Connection 6 bit 7 bit 7 Transmission error signal Connection 6 bit 8 Open request signal Connection 5 bit 8 Receive notified signal Connection 7 bit 9 bit 9 Receive complete signal Connection 7 bit A Open request signal Connection 6 bit A Transmission complete signal Connection 7 bit B bit B Transmission error signal Connection 7 bit C Open request signal Connection 7 bit C Receive notified signal Connection 8 bit D bit D Receive complete signal Connection 8 bit E Open request signal Connection 8 bit E Transmission complete signal Connection 8 bit F bit F Transmission error signal Connection 8 362H bit 0 E mail receive request signal 366H bit O Receive error signal Connection 1 bit 1 E mail receive error signal bit 1 Receive error signal Connection 2 bit 2 E mail transmission complete signal bit 2 Receive error signal Connection 3 bit 3 E mail transmission error signal bit 3 Receive error signal Connection 4 bit 4 E mail log notified complete signal bit 4 Receive error signal Connection 5 bit 5 E mail error log notified
176. etting the open processing using the ladder program Setting item Setting method Internal relay allocation Ladder program Initialization processing Configurator ET Open processing Configurator ET Data transfer Ladder program Setting using the setup tool Configurator ET Setting the connection using the setup tool Configurator ET To set the open processing using the setup tool Configurator ET confirm that a check mark is NOT placed in The connection 1 to 8 are set by ladder program check box E erva Eie Seres Mei Seines Yew Ore Open tho DFU GAGA STA Plomecn Communcation nemos Open method in the TOP P Communication Rnction Source pot runter Destination P adress Destination port number Freectent Sje The cometan 1 to ae set by ladder proma gt r e i hisis Hb AmE The connection 1 to 8 are set by ste oo Destination MEWTOCOL station number PPR Oectination Ethernet ackiwoe Unused connection cut tine marten Pecca times Correcten sere Setting the initialization processing using the Configurator ET Classification Setting item Description Initialization Initialization Source node Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 processing information setting Communication between Not used setting networks Source node MEWTOCOL 1 station No Time setting Default Transparent communicatio
177. fer size for 0000H transparent communication 15 8 Routing information setting area Bank 0 Shared memory Initialization information setting area area Routing information setting Bank 0 Address 230H to 24FH area User system Connection information setting area Initialization information notified area Connection information notified area Handshake area Error log area Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Address Name Default Set value and explanation 230H Network 0000H FF000000H to FFFFFFFCH Field value that determines network subnetwork address or subnetwork address masking L The network subnetwork mask is a value that sets the 32 bit 231H Network 0000H network address used as the IP address and the bit used for the subnetwork subnetwork address to 1 masking H Example FF000000H For a Class A network 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFC00000H When 2 bits are used for a Class A network 1111 1111 1100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFFFOOOOH For a Class B network 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFFFFOOOH When 4 bits are used for a Class B subnetwork 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 FFFFFFOOH For a Class C network 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 FFFFFFEOH When 3 bits are used for a Class C subnetwork 111111111111 1111 1111 1111 1110 0000
178. fied for the source node or another node Steps to take Specify using the correct format code 62H Registration error When using the computer link function Too many registrations have been entered or a registration has not been entered monitor registration trace registration etc When there are too many registrations reset the registrations Steps to take Specify using the correct format code 63H Mode error When using the computer link function When a command was transmitted the operation mode was one in which that command cannot be processed Steps to take Specify using the correct format code 65H Protect error When using the computer link function An attempt was made to write data to a program area or system register while the memory protect status was in effect Steps to take Data cannot be written while the memory protect status is in effect 66H Address error When using the computer link function An error occurred indicating that the code format BCD HEX etc for the address program address absolute address etc data is excessive insufficient or the wrong range has been specified Steps to take Specify using the correct format code 67H No data error When using the computer link function The data to be read does not exist An attempt was made to read a comment registration or other data that has not been written Steps to take Specify using
179. flash when an error occurs in the unit itself or when a communication error occurs E1 flashing Recovery possible error E1 lighted Initialization processing error E2 flashing Warning error E2 lighted System error E1 E2 LED E1 E2 LED 17 TT TU Ts ROY TX AXTEST CE1 E RDY TX RX TES 1008 108T 10B512V RMT 1008 108T Unit operation if an ERROR LED lights flashes ERROR LED status ET LAN unit operation CPU unit operation When E1 is flashing Operation is continued Operation is continued When E1 is lighted Operation is continued Operation is continued When E2 is flashing Operation is continued Operation is continued When E2 is lighted This notifies the user of a run If the ALM LED is lighted away unit or another problem operation is stopped involving the unit Normal In any other case operation is operation cannot be continued continued gi Note The E2 LED also lights if an error occurs in the transmission line during an external loopback test 13 3 13 2 What to Do If an Error Occurs 13 2 1 If the Alarm ALM LED Lights on the ET LAN Unit Situation The watchdog timer is activated to alert the user of a problem with ET LAN unit Solution Turn the power supply off and then on again If the ALM LED lights again there may be a problem with the unit If the ALM LED goes ou
180. following settings are required using the ladder program Seiting item Setting method Internal relay allocation Ladder program Open processing Initialization processing Ladder program Ladder program Data transfer Ladder program Setting using the ladder program Internal relay allocation Classification Device number Device used in program example Completed signal area RO to R1F RC Initialization complete signal RD Initialization error signal R11 Open error signal Connection 1 Request signal area R40 to R5F R4C Initialization request signal R50 Open request signal Connection 1 Data register allocation miasoitcation ot Device Setting item Settings used in the program processing number Initialization DT10 to Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 processing DT11 COA80101H DT12 Communication function setting Not used between networks DT13 Source node MEWTOCOL 01 station No Open processing DT20 Open method MEWTOCOL communication TCP IP Full Passive open DT21 Source node port No 8000 DT22 to Destination node IP address 192 168 1 2 DT23 COA80102H DT24 Destination node port No 8000 DT25 Destination node MEWTOCOL 05 station No Data transfer DT22 to Source node route No 1 processing DT23 Destination node MEWTOCOL 05 station No Number of transferred words 3 Data transfer area DT100 to Transfer data writing area DT
181. following time 1 Jan 2030 Tuesday 00 00 00 Japan time Indication Date Tue 01 Jan 2030 00 00 00 900 1 12 1 5 Unit Version and Communication Setting Method Various communication settings such as IP address and communication method should be specified for using the ET LAN unit The setting method varies depending on the version of the used ET LAN unit Version of ET LAN Unit Communication setting method ET LAN Unit Ver 1 00 or later Ladder program Ladder program or Configurator ET Can be switched by the mode setting switches ET LAN Unit Ver 2 00 or later 1 5 1 Configurator ET Configurator ET is an exclusive tool for setting the communication settings or e mail function of the ET LAN unit Configuration ET can be used with Ver 2 00 or later of ET LAN unit Name Required OS Hard disk capacity Model No Windows 95 Japanese OSR2 or later AFPS321 10 Windows 98 Control Configurtor ET poeeme Windows ME 20MB or later pp Windows 2000 English Windows XP AFPS32510 Windows Vista 1 6 Restrictions Relating to Communication Conditions and Functions 1 6 1 Precautions When Using the FP2 CPU Unit If the codes MC MD MG for monitor commands are used among the commands sent from the host computer commands being sent from multiple computers will prevent data from being read and written correctly Note If monitor commands are sent from multiple com
182. for the TCP IP Q tion method currently set communication method Open This is valid only when TCP IP is specified for the Active method communication method 2 Select one method among the followings 5 Active Fullpassive or Unpassive 3 Application When using computer link or data transfer select MEWTOCOL MEWTOCOL in which communication communication 9 connection When using transparent communication select Transparent is used communication Source node Specify any port number other than 0 0 port No A value of 8000 1F40H or higher is recommended Destination lt When using TCP Fullpassive and Active open gt 0 node IP address Specify an IP address for the destination node that is in the same class and is other than 0 0 0 0 or 255 255 255 255 lt When using UDP gt Specify an IP address for the destination node that is in the same class and is other than 0 0 0 0 Connection lt When using TCP Unpassive gt information No address needs to be specified settings Destination Specify any port number other than 0 0 1to 8 node A value of 8000 1F40H or higher is recommended port No lt When using TCP Unpassive gt No address needs to be specified Destination Specify the station number of the destination node 0 node when MEWTOCOL communication is performed MEWTOCOL Setting range 1 to 64 station No Avoid duplicating the number of another station on the network This i
183. formation on the e mail data size network is not busy the ET was not acquired successfully LAN unit E mail was not deleted flashes successfully UID was not acquired successfully Response format error occurred Response error occurred POP server operation could not be checked C103H POP server E mail information was not Check if the e mail is not error acquired successfully compressed or encrypted Check if the encode decode format and file format are the same as ones for ET LAN Check if the e mail is not divided C104H POP server APOP is not supported Check if the POP server can be error indentified using the password C105H POP server POP server receive time out error Check if the POP server works error occurred normally Check if the POP server or network is not busy C110H Setting error The values of e mail settings are Check if the e mail settings are incorrect correct C111H POP internal Specified UID does not exist Turn OFF the power and then error Re initialization error occurred turn it ON Initialization error occurred If the error occurs again please Insufficient internal resource contact us File was not created successfully C112H Receive e mail E mail with the unauthorized Check Mail Filter settings filter error address and subject was received This error occurs when Mail Filter is set C113H Receive e mail ET LAN received an e mail in the Check the e mail contents of the format
184. fset Name Default Set value and explanation address 1 Source node 0000H Set value TCP or UDP communication process port number port No Set any port number other than OH a value of 1025 401H or higher is connections 1 recommended to 8 2 Partner node 0000H Set value Partner node IP address IP address L When using TCP Fullpassive and Active open connections 1 Specify an IP address for the partner node that is in the same class and to 8 is other than OH or FFFFFFFFH 3 Partner node 0000H When using UDP IP address H Use an IP address for the partner node that is in the same class and is connections 1 other than OH to 8 When using TCP Unpassive open No address needs to be specified 4 Partner node 0000H Set value Partner node port number port No Set any port number other than OH a value of 1025 401H or higher is connections 1 recommended to 8 This is not necessary when using TCP Unpassive open 5 Partner node 0000H Set value 1 to 64 MEWTOCOL Set the station number of the partner node when MEWTOCOL station number communication is being carried out connections 1 Avoid duplicating the number of another station on the network to 8 This is ignored if MEWTOCOL communication is not being used 6 Partner node 0000H Set value Ethernet address of partner node lower Ethernet When using TCP Active open if the partner node has no ARP function word address specify this 7 connections 1 0000H Example
185. g has been completed successfully Other than 0 Error code when auto open processing ended in an error Error logs are also stored in the error log area 1 Source node port No Stored value System connections 1 to 3 Source node port numbers for various connections 2 Destination node IP address L Stored value System connections 1 to 3 Destination node IP addresses for various connections after auto 3 Destination node IP address H open processing has been completed System connections 1 to 3 The value is not entered until auto open processing has been successfully completed 4 Destination node port No Stored value System connections 1 to 3 Destination node IP port numbers for various connections after auto open processing has been completed The value is not entered until auto open processing has been completed successfully 5 Destination node MEWTOCOL Stored value station number Destination node MEWTOCOL station numbers for various System connections 1 to 3 connections after auto open processing has been completed The value is not entered until auto open processing has been completed successfully 6 Connection closing time min Stored value Connection is closed when no communication is performed during the time specified here The set value is written 7 Reserved Reserved 8 Communication method Refer to 10 2 4 Reading system connection information settings of System connections 1 to 3 this manual
186. ge environment Also if the transceiver is positioned close to a control board we recommend using it at a distance of 5 m or less 1 5 1 1 5 Connections Between Networks p ET LAN unit FP2 FP2SH Source network To any desired network Loo E Communication through Communication through default router router 1 to router 5 With an Ethernet communication is possible not only between the home network and a node but also between the nodes of other networks using routers As shown in the illustration above communication with nodes of other networks is classified as follows The router is registered in advance and communication is carried out between partner nodes of adjacent networks other networks 1 2 3 etc in the above illustration Communication is carried out with the partner nodes of networks other than those shown above other networks A B C etc in the above illustration g Key Point When using the ET LAN unit to carry out communication with partner nodes on another network the router used by the ET LAN unit should be registered 1 Up to five routers can be registered for the source network enabling communication with any of the nodes on another adjacent network See other networks 1 2 3 etc in the left illustration 2 Only a single default router can be registered and communication carried out with any desired node on any network other than those covered by 1 through the default
187. gram Protocol UDP is a connectionless communication method which provides only data communication in IP units In the UDP communication method since no re transmission sequence or flow control for the communication data is provided support at the application level is required to guarantee communication reliability IP Internet Protocol IP is used to transmit data in units of datagrams to partner node specified by an IP address It provides function such as the dividing and reassembling of communication data and communication services between networks via a router ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is used to transmit the error message in the IP The ET LAN unit supports the echo replay option only to the ping command ARP Address Resolution Protocol ARP is used to transmit the Ethernet physical address which is essential to Ethernet communications by specifying the IP address When an ET LAN unit accesses a station with unknown Ethernet address you only need to specify its IP address using the broadcast method AUI Attachment Unit Interface AUI is a transceiver cable that connects the ET LAN unit with a transceiver 1 2 2 Communication Functions MEWTOCOL Communication Function There are two MEWTOCOL communication functions a computer link function and a data transfer function Computer link function MEWTOCOL COM ASCII communication Computer link communications can be realized by transmitting M
188. he initialization complete signal is ON or OFF 11 5 E mail Function E mail sending function Error Notice E mail When an error occurs in the CPU unit a fixed message is sent to the specified destination The message of the e mail cannot be edited i Reference For detailed setting procedure refer to Chapter 4 3 of Control Configurator ET Operational Guide Book ARCT1F341E For the error codes to be sent see Chapter 10 6 Error Codes of the FP2 FP2SH Hardware manual ARCT1F320E Error occurred in the CPU unit Notification via e mail The FPDFP2SH CPU eror occured Date Tw 01 Jan 2030 00 00 00 0900 Error Code E 10 Internet aes Note If an error that disables the unit from normal operation e g ALARM LED of the CPU unit lights up occurs e mails cannot be sent successfully Report Mail E mails are sent to the designated destination at the specified intervals or at the specified date Time intervals can be specified within the range of 1 to 120 min E mails can be sent to the designated destination at an appointed date that can be specified with month day hour and minute Up to 3 sending time can be specified per a Report Mail A periodical e mail from the PLC Notification via e mail Device isnpection required Internet Device Watch Mail When a device of the programmable controller meets a certain condit
189. he ET LAN unit flashes error from the IP Assembly timeout error During assembly of the IP split data the remaining data was not received within the allowed time limit Specified IP address does not exist There was no response to an ARP request for the specified IP address of the partner node Checksum error This notification is received if the IP header checksum value of an IP packet that has been received is not correct Internal resource error This notification is received if the IP resource is insufficient Different IP address was specified for sub network address from that of source node This notification is received if the IP address specified for the partner node is different from that of the source node This does not occur if a router address was specified however processing again If communication cannot be performed after the occurrence of error use the reset function or turn the power off and on again Code Name Description Step to take Remark A001H UDP checksum The checksum value of the Send the data once again If any of these error UDP packet received from the from the partner node errors occur the E1 partner node is erroneous LED on the front A002H UDP IP level Communication processing was Carry out the panel of the ET error carried out with a different port communication processing LAN unit flashes number than the one registered with the corr
190. he bits of the handshake area in the I O or shared memory being turned on and off Communi Shared memory Net Communica tion request controller Program of Functions of ET LAN unit programmable controller 3 Key Point With the transparent communication function the programmable controller or computer specifies an IP address to open a connection with the communication destination After the connection has been opened communication processing on the programmable controller side is carried out by data being read from or written to the communication buffer of the shared memory through the ladder program and by communication requests being executed Up to eight connections can be used on a single ET LAN unit by using the transparent communication function in conjunction with MEWTOCOL communication functions computer linking and data transfer 9 2 Transparent Communication Procedures To carry out transparent communication using an ET LAN unit initialization processing is first carried out for the unit and then a connection is opened between the source node and the partner node through open processing Once this connection has been opened communication processing is executed through the ladder program Procedure for transparent communication with the ET LAN unit Initialization process ing separately for See Chapter 5 Initialization Processing and each unit Termination Processing Open processing se
191. he cable under 5 m in length We recommend that you use a high reliability connector type for the transceiver External power supply terminal connections Connect the external power supply terminal on the front panel of the unit to 12 V DC power supply to power the transceiver cable Note that the internal voltage drop is 1 V max Earth The F G pin of the external power supply terminal on the front of the unit is connected to the outer metallic shell of the 100BASE TX 10BASE T connector RJ45 or the outer metallic shell of the 10BASE5 AUI connector These are also connected to the F G terminal of the power supply unit through the backplane In an environment with a high noise level the F G terminal should be grounded at a grounding resistance of 100 Q or less 3 3 Test Mode The ET LAN unit has a test mode function that checks whether the unit is operating properly after it has been installed 3 3 1 Types and Contents of Test Modes Contents of test mode Item Test mode 1 Test mode 2 Mode setting switch test Available Available LED test Available Available ROM test Available Available RAM test Available Available Shared memory test Available Available Timer test Available Available Internal loopback test Available Available External loopback test Not available Available Loopback test Running a loopback test checks the functions of the control section and communica
192. hernet LAN ET LAN unit IP address XXXXXXXX ET LAN unit IP address XXXXXXXX IP address XXXXXXXX With the transparent communication function transparent data transmission and reception between computer and programmable controller and programmable controller and programmable controller is possible Storage and extraction of the communication data at the programmable controller is carried out by reading from and writing to the ET LAN unit s shared memory communication buffer The communication requests are performed by switching on and off bits in the I O or shared memory handshake areas I Commu l nication Communication buffer data Shared I x i memory 5 i z I Handshake area v Commu i Reception lt nication lt data j I I S Programmable ET LAN unit functions controller program g Key Point With transparent communication either the computer or programmable controller specifies the IP address and they open a mutual connection with the communication partner After opening a connection communication processing on the programmable controller side is done by the ladder program reading from and writing to the communication buffer of shared memory and executing the communication requests With the transparent communication function and the MEWTOCOL communications function computer link and data transfer you can simultaneously use a maximum of eight connections with on
193. ht Approx 130 g 15 1 2 Performance Specifications Limitations Item Description 32SX 32SY I O occupation Up to the following numbers can be installed in any basic mother board slot including Multi wiring link unit W2 mode FP2 CPU unit 3 units FP2SH CPU unit 8 units Communication function MEWTOCOL COM computer link function Max 2KB Y 7 MEWTOCOL DAT data transfer Max 1 020 words Transparent communication Number of System S i connection Max 3 connections connections Note3 4 peruni Connection Max 8 connections aka A Transmit Factory setting 1 K words connection x 3 communication buffer Note Receive Factory setting 1 K words connection x 3 Buffer memory size for storing e mail data 96K bytes Error Notice Mail A fixed message including the error occurrence date time and error code is sent to the entered destination when an error is detected in a CPU unit Address Boo k Supported 1 Fixed interval 1 to 120 minutes email Report Mail 2 Appointed time month day hour minute Up to 3 appointed 8 functions times can be registered see Select either 1 or 2 2 Devi 1 Bit device watch X Y R L T and C 2 WaN i 2 Word device watch WX WY WR WL DT SV EV FL and LD 2 atch Mal Select either 1 or 2 g oe memory size per 2000 characters including a line feed uw Max 32 To Cc
194. ignal area Bank 0 Addresses 364H 365H is reflected in WR12 and WR13 The expanded complete signal area 2 Bank 0 Address 3664 is reflected in WR14 WR20 and WR21 are reflected in the request signal area Bank 0 Addresses 368H 369H WR22 and WR23 are reflected in the expansion request signal area Bank 0 Addresses 36CH 36DH Flow of processing when re initialization and re open processing are not carried out after a switch to RUN mode PROG mode RUN mode Initialization processing completed Bank 0 Address 360H Bit C 1 Initialization processing processing completed Open complete signal for relevant connection YES Open processing Communication processing Chapter 5 Initialization Processing and Termination Processing 5 1 Initialization Termination Processing 5 1 1 What is Initializaiton Processing Setting the various conditions for communication and booting the ET LAN unit is called initialization processing In initialization processing the contents of the initialization information setting area and the routing information setting area in the shared memory of the ET LAN unit are specified If close processing has been completed for all of the connections termination processing can be carried out to stop the ET LAN unit Items set during initialization processing Setting area Setting item Source node IP address Communica
195. in The connection 1 to 8 are set Download by ladder program check box Configurator ET the setup tool can be uploaded and downloaded irrespective of the auto connection function ON OFF status Mp Reference Concerning the use of Configurator ET refer to Control Configurator ET Operational Guide Book ARCT1F341E 10 4 10 1 1 Reading Auto Connection Status Information The auto connection status check area Bank 10H Addresses 040H to 04FH as shown in the diagram below can be read from the shared memory when the auto connection function is valid In this process connection status of System connections 1 to 3 and open processing method of Connections 1 to 8 set for the ET LAN unit can be checked Shared memory Emailstatusarea mail status Emailstatusarea User system area 2 2k words E mailerrorlogarea mail error Emailerrorlogarea area area check area tion notified area E mail send log area Bank 10H Addresses 040H to 04FH E mail receive log area La ner Note Shared memory addresses are allocated in word 16 bit units Auto connection status check area Bank 10H Address Name Stored value and Explanation 040H Auto connection function status 041H Normal connections 1 to 8 open processing setup procedure 042H System connection 1 status Auto connection function status Mode setting switch 2 status is stored OOH Auto connection func
196. ination node port No Specify the port number other than 0 A value of 8000 or higher is recommended lt When using TCP Unpassive gt No address needs to be specified Destination node MEWTOCOL station No Specify the station number of the destination node when MEWTOCOL communication is used Values 1 to 64 can be selected Avoid duplicating the number of another station on the network Destination node Ethernet address Not used 00 00 00 00 Connection closing time min When no communication is performed by the partner within the time specified here the connection is closed When the set value is 0 the connection is not closed cS Note System connection can be set only with the setup tool Configurator ET Even if the ladder program is used settings cannot be performed System connection can be used when the auto connection function is available Mode setting switch 2 is ON System connection automatically executes re open processing when the connection is closed from the partner and goes into the ready status to open the connection The number noted above is indicated in decimal number For the hexadecimal numbers H is added after the number 10 24 LED operation in the system connection RMT LED display status is as shown below RMT LED Description ON When any connection among System connecti
197. ing To Address No 1 Specifying Cc Address Nos 6 and 32 Specifying Bec Not used Specifying Message No Message No 1 Specifying Signature Signature No 5 Writing in the ladder send e mail setting area E mail send request signal ON Allocation of handshake area for internal relay H1 WR 2 POA E mail complete signal area H 36A HI Ladder send e mail processing H8 HO R42 RST E mail send request signal E mail send request signal OFF 11 9 Receiving E mails using the Ladder Program Whether e mails are received or not can be checked by the instruction using the ladder program E mail receive processing is executed by turning ON the e mail receive request signal in the handshake area which is allocated in the ET LAN unit using the ladder program of the CPU unit T Reference lt Chapter 4 Confirming the Design Contents gt E mail receive complete signal area Bank 0 Address Description bitO E mail receive complete signal 362H s bit1 E mail receive error signal E mail receive request signal area Bank 0 Address Description 36AH bitO E mail receive request signal Time chart for e mail receive processing Next signal processing E mail receive 4 4 request signal N L 3 p 1 Ladder program processing E mail receive complete signal 1 E mail receive Wh error signal 4 ET LAN u
198. ion Computer link and Data transfer Hierarchical communication gy Key Point The programmable controller specifies the IP address and MEWTOCOL station number 1 to 64 and opens a connection with its communication partner s node using MEWTOCOL communication mode When the programmable controller receives the MEWTOCOL command message it returns a response message automatically so there is no need to describe a program to generate a response With the MEWTOCOL communications function and the transparent communications function you can simultaneously use a maximum of eight connections with one ET LAN unit The computer link function and data transfer function can be executed simultaneously using one connection Hierarchical communication via other MEWNET networks is also possible When using the data transfer function we recommend that you use TCP IP to guarantee communications reliability When carrying out remote programming and monitoring the ET LAN unit settings should be set to the MEWTOCOL communication mode and to TCP IP communication and the processing of the various flags should be executed through a shared memory handshake Transparent Communication Function ET LAN unit IP address XXXXXXXX Sa IP address XXXXXXXX O Sending data Receiving data Transparent communication Receiving data Sending data Ethernet LAN Transparent communication Ethernet LAN Et
199. ion see Example below an e mail is sent to the designated destination Example YO turns ON or OFF Turning ON OFF the flag DTO is 100 Monitoring the device DTO is equal to the value of WRO or the value of DT1 becomes larger than the value of FLO Comparing the devices Comparing the devices Monitoring the CPU unit data device a Material shortage Notification via e mail Supply a deficiency Internet aS ne Note When the status of the monitored device on the CPU unit changes in a short time the ET LAN unit may not be able to detect the change As the number of monitored devices or the amount of connection communication increases the interval for monitoring devices becomes longer Refer to the following calculation method to enable to surely detect the change in the target device How to calculate the interval of monitoring time When without the connection communication Interval of monitoring time 50 x N ms If the conditions for device monitoring are satisfied when the power is supplied a Device Watch Mail is sent to the specified destination Ladder send e mail When the e mail send request flag in the shared memory turns ON an e mail is sent to the specified destination The e mail message which is registered using the Configurator ET in advance is determined by specifying using the ladder program K3 a Reference Chapter 3 5 Sending E mail Using the Ladder Pr
200. ion 1 bit 2 Transmission complete signal Connection 1 bit 2 Transmission complete signal Connection 1 bit 3 Transmission error signal Connection 1 bit 3 Transmission error signal Connection 1 bit 4 Receive notified signal Connection 2 bit 4 Receive notified signal Connection 2 bit 5 Receive complete signal Connection 2 bit 5 Receive complete signal Connection 2 bit 6 Transmission complete signal Connection 2 bit 6 Transmission complete signal Connection 2 bit 7 Transmission error signal Connection 2 bit 7 Transmission error signal Connection 2 bit 8 Receive notified signal Connection 3 bit 8 Receive notified signal Connection 3 bit 9 Receive complete signal Connection 3 bit 9 Receive complete signal Connection 3 bit A Transmission complete signal Connection 3 bit A Transmission complete signal Connection 3 bit B Transmission error signal Connection 3 bit B Transmission error signal Connection 3 bit C Initialization complete signal bit C Receive notified signal Connection 4 bit D Initialization error signal bit D Receive complete signal Connection 4 bit E bit E Transmission complete signal Connection 4 bit F Error log notified complete signal bit F Transmission error signal Connection 4 361H bit 0 Open request signal Connection 1 365H bit 0 Receive notified signal Connection 5 bit 1 bit 1 Receive complete signal Connection 5 bit 2 Open requ
201. ion disabled status Steps to take Use the application program to send the transmission again 32H Transmission The transmission was interrupted because the buffer of the source node impossible error overflowed Steps to take Keep the data size within the maximum range 33H Communication stop The transmission was interrupted because the network access switch of the MEWNET H link unit serving as a relay was off Steps to take Turn on the network access switch 36H No destination error No partner station exists on the network Network access was disengaged Steps to take Check to see if a partner station exists on the network Use the application program to send the transmission again 38H Other Transmission error other than the above communication Steps to take errors Use the application program to send the transmission again Note1 When the error occurred on the second or a higher hierarchy level of a multiple hierarchy link no response will be returned Note2 For basic procedure errors processing errors and programmable controller application errors if a link related error including hierarchical occurred within the network no response will be returned 14 31 Basic procedure error Error code Error name Steps to take 40H BCC error When using the computer link function A BCC error occurred in the command data Steps to take Use the app
202. ion information Routing information area setting area User system setting area Connection information notified area Initialization information Bank 0 Address 2D0H to 2DFH notified area Connection information Handshake area Error log area Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Address Name Stored value and explanation 2D0H Initialization processing Stored value 0 Initialization processing was completed successfully complete code Other than 0 Error code Initialization processing ended in an error 2D1H Source node IP address Stored value Source node IP address when initialization processing was L completed successfully 2D2H Source node IP address The written value is the source node address in the initialization H information setting area The value is not valid until initialization processing has been completed successfully 2D3H Communication function Stored value 0 Communication function setting between networks is not setting between networks used 1 Communication function setting between networks is used The value is not valid until initialization processing has been completed successfully 2D4H Source node Stored value Source node MEWTOCOL station number when MEWTOCOL station initialization processing was completed successfully number The written value
203. is used with both the FP2 CPU and the FP2SH CPU Example When using transparent communication to send 1 000 bytes of data Transmission processing time 0 017 x 1 000 bytes 8 ms 25 ms Note The transmission processing time of MEWTOCOL communication and transparent communication gets longer with the e mail function to perform communication processing by automatically generating MEWTOCOL in order to get the status of the CPU unit within the ET LAN unit Referring to the following calculate the transmission processing time When using the FP2 CPU Transmission processing time Minimum transmission delay time without using the e mail function 10 0 0025 x no of automatically generated MEWTOCOL bytes ms When using the FP2SH CPU Transmission processing time Minimum transmission delay time without using the e mail function 6 0 0035 x no of automatically generated MEWTOCOL bytes ms The automatically generated MEWTOCOL is 18 bytes at minimum and it increases according to the type or number of the obtained device Reference For the details of MEWTOCOL see lt 14 1 MEWTOCOL COM Computer Link gt 15 29 15 6 ASCII Codes 15 30 15 7 Dimensions AFP2790 FP2 ET1 93 including backplane AFP27901 FP2 ET2 93 including backplane 15 31 Chapter 16 Sample Program 16 1 Sample Program 16 1 1 An Overview of the
204. itionally other than the conventional information the following information can be newly read Auto connection information readout items Bila Name Stored value Explanation 0 Open processing Stored value complete code 0 Open processing has been completed successfully Connections 1 to 8 Other than 0 Error code when open processing ended in an error When re open processing is conducted the results are overwritten Error codes are also stored in the error log area 1 Source node port Stored value No Source node port numbers for various connections after open processing has Connections 1 to 8 been completed The value is not entered until open processing has been successfully completed 2 Destination node IP Stored value address L Destination node IP addresses for various connections after open processing Connections 1 to 8 has been completed 3 Destination node IP The value is not entered until open processing has been successfully address H completed Connections 1 to 8 4 Destination node Stored value port No Destination node port No for various connections after open processing has Connections 1 to 8 been completed The value is not entered until open processing has been successfully completed 5 Destination node Stored value MEWTOCOL station Destination node MEWTOCOL station numbers for various connections after No open processi
205. k Send log block a Send log block E mail send log area i for 32 blocks Send og block gt E mail status area E mail error log area for 32 blocks E mail receive log area for 32 blocks Send log block Bank 11H Address 0200H O3FFH lt Latest error log block Receive log block Receive log block Receive log block Receive log block Receive log block Receive log block Receive log block Older error log block 11 22 11 10 2 Reading E mail Error Log Contents of the error log block Up to 32 error log blocks can be registered in the e mail error log area Send and receive errors are mixed in the area When the number of the error log block exceeds 32 the older log in the e mail error log area s last block is overwritten E mail send errors Bank 10H Address 0200H 03FFH Offset address Name Explanation 0 L Date Min D ate Day Date and time when e mail is sent are stored 1 H Date Month 2 Send e mail The sent e mail message No identification No 3 Reserved Reserved Used in the system 4 Specifying To Higher 16 bits Nos 1 16 PEE see GS E mail address No set for To is stored using the bit data 5 Specifying To Lower 16 bits Nos 17 32 6 Specifying Cc Higher 16 bits Nos 1 16 Gees Ae E mail address No set for Cc is stored using
206. l Configurator ET Untitle Configurator ET Eile Unit Settings Mail Settings View Online Option Help OS S6Q e 4 ET LAN Unit hitialization Settings System Connection Settings Connection lt x I The connection 1 to 8 are set by ladder program Connection Settings p Information hitialize H Mail Settings Communication method fTCP IP Ha Heip Open method in the TCP IP Active Gammuninatinn function 2 IMFWTOAGOL In the auto open processing the open processing is automatically conducted when the auto initialization processing is completed Therefore the open request signal does not need to be ON for each connection Whether the auto initialization processing is completed or not can be checked using the open complete signal and the open error signal in the conventional I O handshake area or in the shared memory handshake complete signal area Items set with the Configurator ET during auto open processing Setting information Setting item Common setting Open processing set with the ladder program Valid or Invalid Connection setting Valid Invalid Communication method TCP IP or UDP IP Application being Open method Active Fullpassive or Unpassive used Application using the communication MEWTOCOL ar communication or Transparent communication Open setting information Source node port No a S Destination node IP add
207. l data section command senddatasize len 2 BCC size 1 CR size Creates MEWTOCOL header senddata FTI 0x10 senddata padding 0 Fixed 0 senddata datasize_L unsigned char senddatasize Data size L senddata datasize_H senddatasize 256 Data size H senddata COMorDAT 0x00 0x00 MEWTOCOL COM 0x02 MEWTOCOL DAT senddata reserved 0 0 Fixed 0 senddata reserved 1 0 Fixed 0 senddata reserved 2 0 Fixed 0 senddata reserved 3 0 Fixed 0 senddata reserved 4 0 Fixed 0 senddata dst_rout MEW_DST_NO Destination for MEWTOCOL station number senddata src_rout MEW_SRC_NO Source for MEWTOCOL station number MEWTOCOL data section created 1 Command copied to data section 2 BCC is determined and added at end of actual data using 2 byte ASCII hexadecimal code 3 CR 0x0D added at end sprintf senddata data s 02X c cmd BCD cmd len 0x0d Determines overall transmission size sendsize 12 Size of expanstion header section senddatasize Size of data section Sends to partner station if crr send sno char amp senddata sendsize 0 lt 0 return ERROR Send error Receives response from partner node Determines overall reception size recvsize 12 Size of expansion header section 6 Si
208. l logs 1 The e mail log notified request signal is turned ON The address 36AH bit 4 in the e mail request signal area Bank 0 is turned ON 2 The e mail logs e mail send log and e mail receive log are transferred to the shared memory 3 Confirm that the e mail log complete signal Bank 0 Address 362H Bit 4 is ON Confirm that the address 362H bit 4 in the e mail complete signal area Bank 0 is ON 4 The e mail send log area Bank 11H Addresses from 000H and the e mail receive log area Bank 11H Addresses from 200H of the shared memory are read 5 The e mail log request signal is turned OFF 6 The e mail log complete signal is turned OFF To read the next e mail log be sure to confirm that this e mail log notified complete signal has been OFF oO O c 3 z iu c te D N Q Q O sar Reference lt Chapter 4 Confirming the Design Contents gt 11 26 11 10 4 E mail Status Area When the e mail function is used it can be checked that the ET LAN unit normally sends receives e mails by means of the e mail status area After checking the e mail status area If the status is found to be as noted below check the e mail settings and re set them if necessary The e mail send conditions set for the ET LAN unit are met but the number of e mail send complete times and the number of e mail send error are not counted The e mail receive conditions set for the
209. lanation 388H Latest log block area Stored value Latest log information to 8 words The unit itself updates the contents constantly so information can be read 38FH using the shared memory access instructions F150 READ and P150 PREAD without issuing a read request This is cleared to 0 when initialization processing is carried out 390H Log block reading Stored value Data read during lob block read processing to processing area Up to 14 blocks are stored in the log in the order in which the errors 3FFH 8 words x 14 blocks occurred when a read request is issued the error log notified request bit of the handshake area in the I O or shared memory goes on This is cleared to 0 when initialization processing is carried out Note1 Addresses 380H to 382H should be set before the error log notified request is issued Note2 The ET LAN unit writes the latest values to addresses 385H to 38FH Note3 The ET LAN unit writes values to addresses 390H to 3FFH after the error log notified request has been issued 15 24 15 4 Table of Related Relays Registers and Instructions 15 4 1 System Register Item Address Name Default Description Action on 22 Operation settings when an Stop Stop continuation error for intelligent unit error occurs FP2 and 23 Operation settings when an Stop Stop continuation FP2SH I O verification error occurs Time 29 Operation time setting for 240 us 0 to 52428
210. lication program to send the transmission again 41H Format error When using the computer link function A command message was sent that does not fit the transmission format There is too much or too little command data or transmission destination does not exist or a similar problem For data transfer function An attempt was made to send a greater volume of data than can be transmitted Steps to take Correct the format and command 42H No support error When using the computer link function A command was sent that is not supported A command is being sent to a destination that is not supported etc Steps to take Use a command that is supported 43H Procedure error When using the computer link function While the programmable controller was waiting for a transmission request message there was still more data to be sent a different command was sent Steps to take Send the transmission request message to the partner node Processing error Error code Error name Steps to take 50H Link setting error When using the computer link function A route number has been specified that does not exist Steps to take Specify the route number correctly 51H Simultaneous operation error When using the computer link function When sending a command to another node the transmission buffer of the sending machine overflowed Steps to take Use the
211. lower word higher word 00 OFF 01 ON Bit 0 to 15 01 to OF Normal response Write successful 80H D2H FFH Error response Write error 80H D2H _ Error code Area code Area type Area code Link relay WL 00 Internal relay WR 01 External output relay WY 02 External input relay WX 03 Timer counter set value area SV 04 Timer counter elapsed value area EV 05 Link data register LD 06 Special internal relay WR 07 Special data register DT 08 Data register DT 09 File register FL OA 14 29 53H Read contact information Reading is carried out from the specified contact of the contact area Command Area code Word No x161 x160 x163 x162 high d Fixed value Nowo Word higher word Bit 0 to 15 01 to OF Normal response Read successful Contact 80H D3H FFH information 00H Fixed value 00 OFF 01 ON Error response Read error 80H D3H Error code Area code Area type Area code Link relay WL 00 Internal relay WR 01 External output relay WY 02 External input relay WX 03 Timer counter set value area SV 04 Timer counter elapsed value area EV 05 Link data register LD 06 Special internal relay WR 07 Special data register DT 08 Data register DT 09 File register FL OA 14 30 14 3 MEWTOCOL Error Codes 14 3
212. lue is written to these it should be OOOOH Transmission Set value Transmission request data size in byte units request data If data is being sent using transparent communication F size 0000H specify the size of the data being sent in byte units connections 1 to 8 Specify a size such that the transmission request data size is less than or equal to the size of the transmission buffer x 2 6 3 Reading Connection Information The current statuses of the settings for the various connections can be read from the shared memory Settings are read from the connection information notified area Bank 0 Address 2E0H to 35FH using the shared memory reading instructions F150 READ and P150 PREAD Initialization information Shared setting area memory Routing information setting area Connection information setting area User system area Initialization information notified area Connection information notified area Handshake area Error log area Bank 0 Address 2E0H to 35FH Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Address 2E0H to 2EFH 2FOH to 2FFH 300H to 30FH 310H to 31FH 320H to 32FH 330H to 33FH 340H to 34FH 350H to 35FH Connection 1 information notified block Connection 2 information notified block Connection 3 information notified block Connection 4 information notified block C
213. mand Command execution order has a problem The parameter for the specified command is not supported Check the SMTP server status through the server administrator C003H SMTP server error The user specified for the destination does not exist Check the e mail settings C004H SMTP server error The specified command was not executed due to a problem in the mail box Check the e mail settings C010H Registered condition setting error Setting contents have a problem which are notified to the SMTP server Check the e mail settings C011H Server connection error Access to the server was not conducted successfully Communication time out error occurred Check the SMTP server status through the server administrator Check if the network is not busy Check the e mail settings C012H Internal resource error Internal memory to be used is insufficient Excessive send buffer size Access to the internal resource was not conducted successfully Turn OFF the power and then turn it ON If the error occurs again please contact us C013H E mail basic setting error for sending e mail User tried to send an e mail although the e mail basic settings were inappropriate Check the e mail basic settings C014H E mail send setting error User tried to send an e mail although the e mail send setting using the ladder program w
214. me Description Step to take Remark C220H Setting value The values of the communication Download the settings again If If this error settings or e mail settings stored in the download is not conducted error the ET LAN unit are abnormal successfully turn OFF the mode occurs setting switch 2 and try to the E2 download once more LED on C221H E mail receive The e mail receive information Turn OFF the power and then the front information stored in the ET LAN unit is turn it ON panel of error abnormal the ET C222H Calendar time The calendar timer value for the Check the calendar timer value LAN unit error CPU unit is not correct Otherwise set for the CPU unit flashes the CPU unit does not have a When the FP2 is used for the calendar timer function CPU unit install an additional memory unit which has the calendar timer function in the CPU unit 12 17 12 3 9 Auto Connection Error These error codes are displayed if an error occurs when using the auto connection function auto connection system connection Code Name Description Step to take Remark B100H Auto Because the communication was Check the communication Even if this disconnection not conducted for the specified application of the error occurs error time connection was once closed destination node the error LEDs and then re opened E1 E2 on the ET LAN unit are off B101H System An error occurred in the
215. mmunication Related to transmission processing EEG Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec tion 1 tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 Transmission Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 request data Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address size 25FH 26FH 27FH 28FH 29FH 2AFH 2BFH 2CFH Transmission Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 pa Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address nee 2EEH 2FEH 30EH 31EH 32EH 33EH 34EH 35EH Transmission Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 complete Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address data size 2EFH 2FFH 30FH 31FH 32FH 33FH 34FH 35FH Related to reception processing ERG Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec Connec tion 1 tion 2 tion 3 tion 4 tion 5 tion 6 tion 7 tion 8 Receive Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 request data Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address size 25DH 26DH 27DH 28DH 29DH 2ADH 2BDH 2CDH Reception Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 notified data Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address size 2EDH 2FDH 30DH 31DH 32DH 33DH 34DH 35DH Reception Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank 0 Bank
216. mplete signal Connection 1 X12 Open complete signal Connection 2 X3 Transmission error signal Connection 1 X13 Open error signal Connection 2 X4 Receive notified signal Connection 2 X14 Open complete signal Connection 3 X5 Receive complete signal Connection 2 X15 Open error signal Connection 3 X6 Transmission complete signal Connection 2 X16 Open complete signal Connection 4 X7 Transmission error signal Connection 2 X17 Open error signal Connection 4 X8 Receive notified signal Connection 3 X18 Open complete signal Connection 5 X9 Receive complete signal Connection 3 X19 Open error signal Connection 5 XA Transmission complete signal Connection 3 X1A Open complete signal Connection 6 XB Transmission error signal Connection 3 X1B Open error signal Connection 6 XC Initialization complete signal X1C Open complete signal Connection 7 XD Initialization error signal X1D Open error signal Connection 7 XE X1E Open complete signal Connection 8 XF Error log notified complete signal X1F Open error signal Connection 8 Output Contact numbers indicate the numbers when installed in slot no 0 No Description No Description Y20 Receive request signal Connection 1 Y30 Open request signal Connection 1 Y21 Y31 Y22 Transmission request signal Connection 1 Y32 Open request signal Connection 2 Y23 Y33 Y24 Receive request signal Connection 2 Y34 Open req
217. n node Communication function setting between networks Not used setting setting Source node MEWTOCOL station No 5 Time setting Default Transparent communication setting Default Open Connection Connection Open method Transparent processing setting information communication setting TCP IP Unpassive Open Source node port No 8000 Destination node IP address 192 168 1 1 COA80102H Destination node port No 8000 Destination node MEWTOCOL station No 1 Connection closing time 1 Number of re open times 255 10 20 Setting using the ladder program Internal relay and data register allocation required for the ladder program are as shown below Common to transmission and reception sides Internal relay allocation Common to transmission and reception sides Classification Device number Device used in program example Complete signal area RO to R1F R1 Receive complete signal R2 Transmission complete signal R3 Transmission error signal RC Initialization complete signal RD Initialization error signal R10 Open complete signal R11 Open error signal Request signal area R40 to R5F R40 Receive request signal R50 Transmission request signal Data register allocation Common to transmission and reception sides Classification Device number Setting item ere ample Reception processing DT210 Receive request data size 1024 words Transmission DT260 Tr
218. n A BCC x10 x100 x16 x160 Response No response 14 24 14 2 MEWTOCOL DAT Data Transfer 14 2 1 Overview of MEWTOCOL DAT Overview of command and response Command message Source Header Text 1 Destination Header Text 2 Response message Notes A dedicated procedure and conversational style format are used Data is sent as binary codes Transmission rights are transferred each time a command message is sent The maximum length for text data is 1 020 words If the transmission source is a programmable controller command messages are transmitted by executing the SEND and RECV commands IES ne Note With MEWTOCOL communication carried out through an ET LAN unit format is used in which the special header shown below is added to MEWTOCOL DAT commands and responses Special header for ET LAN unit MEWTOCOL command response The content of the special header changes depending on the communication conditions 14 25 Command code and Response code Command code aes Area code Command message 80H Text data 1 Response code wak End code FFH Normal code Normal response message 80H Text data 2 Response code Header End code Other than FFH Error code Error response message Table of command Command code Description Corresponding response code 50H Writing to a data area DOH 51H Reading from a data area D1H 52H W
219. n No MEWTOCOL COM response data block Max 2048 bytes The number of bytes comprising the MEWTOCOL COM command or message is converted to hexadecimal data and specified for the Data Size parameter The station number of the station sending the command is specified for Source for MEWTOCOL station number The station number of the station receiving the command is specified for Destination for MEWTOCOL station number 00H should be specified for both Hierarchy level LEVEL and Hierarchy depth DEPTH Destination Source MEWTOCOL station No is specified by converting to hexadecimal data Example of communication data Same hierarchy communication Station No 10 AH Command message Response message lt _ lt Route No Link unit Station No 11 OBH Station No 12 OCH Route No Link unit Link unit gt 13 ODH c 53 x S Station No 14 OEH 8 12 Station No When accessing CPU1 Same hierarchy communication Command message ma eam Same iiiki Data size L Data block size C Data size H 02H Header Fixed value block 02H Level and depth oH of hierarchy C on Destination a C o station number Source station o O f number Data block 4 MEWTOCOL DAT Data block Command Other hierarchy Response message Data size L nas size sei Data block Response 8 4
220. n setting Default Open Connection Connection Open method MEWTOCOL processing setting information communication setting TCP IP Fullpassive open Connection 1 Source node port No 8000 Destination node IP 192 168 1 2 address Destination node port No 8000 Destination node 5 MEWTOCOL station No Connection closing time 1 Number of re open times 255 10 17 Setting using the ladder program Internal relay and data register allocation required for the ladder program are as shown below Internal relay allocation Data register allocation Classification Device number Device used in program example Complete signal area RO to R1F RC initialization complete signal RD Initialization error signal R11 Open error signal Connection 1 Request signal area R40 to R5F R4C Initialization request signal Classification Device number Setting description Setting for program example Data transfer processing DT22 to DT23 Source node route No 1 Destination node 05 MEWTOCOL station No Number of transferred 3 words Data transfer area DT100 to DT102 Transfer data writing area 10 18 Case 2 2 Ladder program example Same as the one which the X Programming is not required sections as shown below are deleted from the ladder program in Case 1 R8010 Eris READ HO 4H 360 H2 gt wo Always on r
221. n the problem is not solved after the replacement please contact us when the problem is not solved after the replacement please contact us 11 31 11 32 Chapter 12 Error Log Function 12 1 Configuration of the Error Log Area 12 1 1 What is the Error Log Function The ET LAN unit is equipped with a log buffer where hardware and communication errors that occur in the unit are recorded The contents of the log buffer are read by using the shared memory access instructions F150 READ and P150 PREAD and F151 WRT and P151 PWRT to read from and write to the error log area of the shared memory Configuration of the error log area Shared memory User system area Initialization information setting area Routing information setting area Connection information setting area Initialization information notified area Connection information notified area Handshake area Error log area Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units 12 2 Bank 0 Address 380H to 3FFH Log block reading pointer Number of reading log block Log buffer size Total number of log Number of log blocks used Latest log block area Log block reading process ing area 14 blocks Reading setting Log buffer Log block Log block Log block Log block Log block Log block Log block Log blo
222. ncvanavencuds 8 1 8 1 An Overview of the Data Transfer Function cceeeeeseeeseteeesneeeeeeeeeeeesesneenseeneneeees 8 2 8 1 1 What is the Data Transfer Function ceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeetaaeeeeneeees 8 2 8 1 2 Commands and Functions that can be USed ccecsceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeneeees 8 3 8 2 Data Transfer ProCeCure sccccecsecceeeseeeeeeesnenseeesneneeenseeeseenseaeseenseaeeeenseaeeeenseeeeeenseeneeenees 8 4 8 3 Settings On the PLE Side ccs icsccczcetecchadi ccgedsccccetediessheesacuccseddcctses es da ae aai daaa aiaa aodai anadan 8 5 8 3 1 Connection Information Settings ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeeseeeesaeeneneeeea 8 5 8 3 2 Writing to the Shared Memory ccccccceseceeceeeeeeaeeeeneeceeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaaeseeneeee 8 7 8 3 3 Sample Progranmsss c iyecsccnsc didein da aaa iad aaraa ada ataandaa io aeiia iadaa 8 8 8 4 Command Communication on the Computer Side cssscsseceeseeeseeeeeseeeenseeeeeees 8 10 8 4 1 Communication Data Format 1 cc ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseneeeeaes 8 10 8 4 2 Communication Data Format 2 cc ccccccceseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeeeaes 8 13 8 4 3 Communication Data Format 3 cc cccccccecseeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeeeaes 8 16 9 Transparent Communication FUNCTION ccccccseseeeseeeeeeeeee
223. nd Structure of ET LAN Unit 1 1 1 Features The FP2 ET LAN unit is an Ethernet 100OBASE TX 10BASE T or 10BASE5 connection interface for TCP IP and UDP IP for the FP2 and FP2SH series programmable controllers FP2 ET LAN unit FP2 ET LANZ2 unit AFP2790 AFP27901 Part No FP2 ET1 Part No FP2 ET2 Supports both TCP IP and UDP IP The ET LAN supports both the TCP IP and UDP IP protocols enabling communication with a broad range of computers and other devices in a network Simultaneous communication possible among up to eight connected connections Communication can be carried out among up to eight connections connected to the network using only a single unit This enables connection to multiple partner nodes Three types of communication interfaces supported Three types of Ethernet communication interfaces are supported Usable interfaces vary according to the models 100BASE TX 10BASE T and 10BASE5 Any one of these interfaces may be used Automatic switching is possible between 100BASE TX and 10BASE T using an auto negotiation function while a switch can be used to switch between 100BASE TX 10BASE T and 10BASE5 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 AFP2790 Available Available Available AFP27901 Available Available Not available Easy to use MEWTOCOL communication and general purpose transparent communication supported The MEWTOCOL communication function computer linking and data transmission that en
224. nd close processing operations can be performed By changing the setting and performing re open processing it is possible to communicate with a different partner 8 4 8 3 Settings on the PLC Side 8 3 1 Connection Information Settings A memory area such as the data registers of the programmable controller is set aside and the data to be written to the connection information area of the shared memory is specified when the open processing is carried out When using data transfer the contents of the specified data are as indicated below MEWTOCOL station No 1 Source node programmable controller ng side ET LAN unit Contents of data settings O and register reanding and writing li MEWTOCOL station No 5 Partner node programmable controller on sending side Network I ol ET LAN unit Address Name Set value and Explanation Set value 0000H a OENE SES When using TCP IP 0 0 00j0000j0000 0000 Active open Setting area Set value 0300H ee DTn for application When using TCP IP 0000j 0011 0000j0000 being used Fullpassive open Set value 0200H When using TCP IP 0000 0 010 000 0 0000 Unpassive open DTn 1 Source node Specify any port number other than OH port No A value of 8000 1F40 or higher is recommended a Partner node Specify the IP address of the partner node n IP address L Example
225. nd that you keep the cable under 10 m in length We recommend that you use shielded cable in environments where electrical noise is likely to be generated External power supply terminal The external power supply terminal is not used when 100BASE TX and 10BASE T are being used Earth The F G pin of the external power supply terminal on the front of the unit is connected to the outer metallic shell of the 100BASE TX 10BASE T connector RJ45 or the outer metallic shell of the 10BASE5 AUI connector These are also connected to the F G terminal of the power supply unit through the backplane In an environment with a high noise level the F G terminal should be grounded at a grounding resistance of 100 Q or less 3 4 3 2 2 10BASE5 AUI Connections AFP2790 Retainer Press downward when connecting connector Terminator Push 1 0BASES AUI 4 j n Transceiver connector 10BASE5 cable g Terminator E External power supply terminal 12V DC 1A or less 10BASE5 AUI connections Connect the transceiver cable to the 10BASE5 AUI connector with D SUB 15 pins retainer on the front panel of the unit After you connect it push down the retainer to fasten the cable Transceiver and transceiver cable The transceiver that you use must comply with IEEE802 3 According to the ratings transceiver cable can be up to 50 m in length but considering noise resistance we recommend that you keep t
226. nection 2 E s Source Partner node node 5 Connection 1 Single setting for source node Not available Not available je oO We recommend setting the port number to a value of 8000 1F40 or higher The same port number can be specified for the source node and the partner node The same port number can be specified for TCP and UDP 6 16 Chapter 7 Computer Link Function 7 1 An Overview of the Computer Link Function 7 1 1 What is the Computer Link Function A computer link is a function that enables a computer to read data from and write data to the I O or register of a programmable controller and to read from and write to the contents of the registers and programs in the controller An interactive communication procedure protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used for the computer link Communication is carried out by the computer sending command instruction messages to the programmable controller and receiving response messages from the programmable controller ET LAN unit When the programmable controller receives a command message it automatically returns a response message After a connection has been opened there is no need to create a program on the programmable controller side to handle communication g Key Point With a computer link the programmable controller specifies an IP address and a MEWTOCOL station number 1 to 64 and opens a connection with the computer p
227. ner node DTn 2 IP address L Example To specify 192 168 1 2 CO A8 01 02H DTn 2 0102H Parin irode DTn 3 COA8H DTn 3 IP address H This is not necessary when using the Unpassive open mode of TCP IP Specify any port number for the partner node other than OH DTn 4 Partner node A value of 8000 1F40 or higher is recommended port No This is not necessary when using the Unpassive open mode of TCP IP DTn 5 at ea Always specify a MEWTOCOL station number of between 1H and station nurber 40H 1 to 64 for the partner node computer When using the Active open mode of TCP IP if the partner node has pee no ARP function specify the Ethernet address of the partner node In Partner node any other case specify OH DTn 7 Ethernet Example To specify 1 2 3 4 5 6 address DTn 6 DTn 8 DTn 7 DTn 8 eS ner Note We recommend specifying a port number of 8000 1F40 or higher Specify a MEWTOCOL station number within a range of 1 to 64 choosing a number that does not duplicate any other station number on the same network When using the Active open mode if the partner node has no ARP function specify the Ethernet address of the partner node for DTn 6 to DTn 8 7 3 2 Writing to the Shared Memory The specified data is written to the connection information setting area of the shared memory using the shared memory writing instructions F151 WRT and P151 PWRT Shared memory address Shared
228. ner node IP address Partner node port No Partner node MEWTOCOL station number Partner node Ethernet address Operation of the ET LAN unit Initializaton processing separately for each unit Open processing Open processing is carried out for the connection to separately for each be used for communication In computer linking sar al l Computer linking communication can processing be carried out with up to 8 connections altogether Transparent communication Close processing separately for each connection Close processing is carried out to release the connection after communication has been completed Termination processing The unit stops after close processing has been completed for all connections separately for each unit The relationship between open processing and close processing Initialization Open Close Termination processing processing processing processing processing Initialization request signal Initialization complete signal Open request signal separately for each connection Open complete signal separately for Note each connection Note When the initialization complete signal is on any number of open processing and close processing operations can be performed By changing the setting and performing re open processing it is possible to communicate with a different partner 6 3 6 1 2 Types of Open Processing Open
229. ng be sure to confirm that the e mail send error signal is OFF MD Note To send e mails using the ladder program the following settings are required 1 Source e mail address This should be specified in advance using Configurator ET 2 SMTP E mail server IP This should be specified in advance using Configurator ET 3 Ladder send e mail settings When all required settings are not specified an e mail is not sent even if the e mail send request signal is turned ON The e mail send error signal is turned ON instead Users are notified of the description of the error by means of the error log S ia Reference Presetting procedures for 1 Source e mail address and 2 SMTP E mail server IP Control Configurator ET Operational Guide Book ARCT1F341E For 3 Ladder send e mail settings Chapter 11 8 2 Ladder Send E mail Settings 11 16 11 8 2 Ladder Send E mail Settings Before sending e mails using the ladder program be sure to confirm that the settings as shown below are registered using the setup tool Configurator ET E mail address es specified for the destination address es To Cc and Bcc Amessage specified in Message No A signature specified in Signature No Ladder send e mail setting area Bank 10H Address Name Default Setting value Explanation 000H Destination address 1 0000H Def
230. ng has been completed Connections 1 to 8 The value is not entered until open processing has been successfully completed 6 Connection closing Stored value time Connection is closed when no communication is performed during the time Connections 1 to 8 specified here The value is not entered until initialization processing has been successfully completed 7 Re opening Stored value information Number of re open times remained Connections 1 to 8 The value is not entered until initialization processing has been successfully completed Higher bytes Lower bytes L Number of re open Specified number of times remained re open times Specified No of re open times The specified number of re open times is stored No of re open times remained The number of re open times remained is stored 8 Communication Stored value method 1 word data that sets the communication conditions for the Opening method various connections as bit information Application in which Bit F E D Cc B A 9 8 F 6 5 4 3 2 1 o connection is used ekotop BM Connections 1to 8 a Communication method b Open method c Application in which 0 TCP IP 00 Active connection is used 1 UDP P 10 Unpassive 0 Used as MEWTOCOL communication 1 Used as transparent communication For details refer to 6 2 3 Writing Data to the Connection Information Setting Area of the ET LAN Unit Technical Manual The value is not entered until initialization processing ha
231. nit processing v 2 n Cc 53 zZ 9 _ w c o D amp n N v 9 o a Procedure to receive e mails 1 The e mail receive request signal is turned ON 2 When the e mail receive processing from the ET LAN unit to the e mail server is completed successfully the e mail receive complete signal is turned ON 3 After confirming that the e mail receive complete signal is ON the e mail receive request signal should be turned OFF 4 When the e mail receive request signal has been turned OFF the e mail receive complete signal is turned OFF 5 If the e mail receive processing is not successfully completed in some reason the e mail receive error signal is turned ON 6 Before conducting the e mail receive processing once again be sure to turn OFF the e mail receive request signal at first 7 When the e mail receive request signal is tuned OFF the e mail receive error signal is turned OFF 11 19 To conduct the e mail receive processing once again be sure to confirm that the e mail receive error signal is OFF cS ne Note To receive e mails using the ladder program the following settings are required in advance using the setup tool Configurator ET Log in name Password POP e mail server IP address When all required settings are not specified an e mail is not received even if the e mail receive request signal is turned ON The e mail receive error signal is turned ON instead Users
232. nitialization complete signal is on open complete signal is on transmission complete signal is off Transmission request signal goes on Conditions Initialization complete signal is on open complete signal is on transmission complete signal is off Transparent Transmission request signal goes off communication Conditions Transmission complete signal is on transmission or transmission error signal is on processing Size of data is read after transmission processing has been completed Condition Transmission complete signal is on Transmission processing end code is read Condition Transmission error signal is on 9 19 Reception processing After the following program has been run the received data is read from the receive buffer R9010 E F150 READ HO H360 H2 WRO Jerse Allocation of complete signal area RO to R1F Allocation of Always on Complete handshake relay signal area area for internal F151WRT HO WR4 H2 H368 ef Allocation of request signal area R40 to R5F realys Request R200 signal area H Fo mv K1024 DT 210 Jevsssssseeeesssssnnseseofeces Size of receive request data is set R10 Ri a Hr 1 Recei ignal Open Piven aaa E Receive request data size is written Initialization complete signal Conditions Initialization complete signal is on 1 gt P151 PWRT HO DT 210 H1 H 25D et open complete signal is on receive complete RC R10 Ri R40 laua oui SET gt eceive complete signal Receive
233. nnection 2 5l bit 7 Send error signal Connection 2 bit7 _ Send error signal Connection 2 bit 8 Receive notified signal Connection 3 bit 8 Receive notified signal Connection 3 bit 9 Receive complete signal Connection 3 bit 9 Receive complete signal Connection 3 bit A Send complete signal Connection 3 bit A Send complete signal Connection 3 bit B Send error signal Connection 3 bitB Send error signal Connection 3 bit C Initialization complete signal bit C Receive notified signal Connection 4 bit D Initialization error signal bit D_ Receive complete signal Connection 4 bit E bit E Send complete signal Connection 4 bit F Error log notified complete signal bit F Send error signal Connection 4 bit 0 Open complete signal Connection 1 bitO Receive notified signal Connection 5 bit 1 Open error signal Connection 1 bit1 Receive complete signal Connection 5 bit 2 Open complete signal Connection 2 bit2 Send complete signal Connection 5 bit 3 Open error signal Connection 2 bit3 Send error signal Connection 5 bit 4 Open complete signal Connection 3 bit 4 Receive notified signal Connection 6 bit 5 Open error signal Connection 3 bit 5 Receive complete signal Connection 6 bit 6 Open complete signal Connection 4 bit6 Receive complete signal Connection 6 IT bit 7 Open error signal Connection 4 J bit7 Send error signal Connection 6 bit 8 Open complete signal Connection 5
234. o connection information setting RC R11 R50 area s 1 hass Open request after initialization Open complete signal Processing has been completed Open error signal Initialization complete signal 7 10 7 4 Command Communication on the Computer Side 7 4 1 Communication Data Format 1 Format when the partner node is on the same hierarchy level as the MEWTOCOL communication If there is no other link unit between the computer and the partner node acting as a relay station the partner node is said to be on the same hierarchy level as the computer With the ET LAN unit if the computer link function is being used with a unit on the same hierarchy level commands and responses are sent and received using the format noted below Higher order computer command transmission source Ethernet LAN Same hierarchy Ethernet LAN t ET LAN unit Format of command transmission data 10H 00H Data size L Data size H 00H 00H 00H 00H Hierarchy level LEVEL Fixed 00H Hierarchy depth DEPTH Fixed OOH Destination for MEWTOCOLstation No Source for MEWTOCOL station No MEWTOCOL COM command data block Max 2048 bytes Precautions concerning format Format of response received data 10H 00H Data size L Data size H 00H 00H 00H 00H Hierarchy level LEVEL Fixed 00H Hierarchy depth DEPTH Fixed OOH Source for MEWTOCOL station No Destination for MEVVTOCOLstation No MEWTOCOL COM
235. o detect the time to execute the reset function 13 3 2 No Communication Notification Function The no communication notification function is a function to notify that communication is not performed longer than a specified time for the connection opened by the open processing of the ET LAN unit Using the no communication notification function enables to detect the state that the ET LAN unit is not communicating Use this function when executing the reset function Procedure 1 Write a value in the following address of the initial information setting area Shared memory Bank 0 to execute the initial processing Initial information setting area Bank 0 Address Name Default Setting value Explanation Set the base time for the no communication connection detection No communication timer value 20an connection time type OOOH OOOOH x 2 minutes Other than 0000H x 6 seconds Setting time Setting value 1 FFFFH x Base time Set the time to detect a no communication state after connection No communication establishment 209H connection detection 0000H The setting value of the above 208H is used as the base time timer value When the setting value is larger than 0064H in case of x 2 minutes 200 minutes in case of x 6 seconds 10 minutes 2 When communication is not performed for the period of the specified time out value the flags of the bits corresponding to each connection in the follo
236. o the connection information area of the shared memory is specified when the open processing is carried out When the transparent communication is being used the contents of specified data are as indicated below Contents of data settings Address Name Set value and Explanation il valje 001M 1 0 0 olo o o 0 0 0 0 olo 0 014 When using UDP IP Set value 0001H When using TCP IP Setting area Active open DTn for application Set value 0301H beingused When using TCP IP Fullpassive open Set value 0201H When using TCP IP Unpassive open DTn 1 Source node Specify any port number other than OH port No A value of 8000 1F40 or higher is recommended Partner node Specify the IP address of the partner node DTn 2 IP address L Example To specify 192 168 1 2 CO A8 01 02H DTn 2 0102H DTn 3 Partner node DT n3 COA8H IP address H This is not necessary when using the Unpassive open mode of TCP IP Specify any port number for the partner node other than OH DTn 4 Partner node A value of 8000 1F40 or higher is recommended port No This is not necessary when using the Unpassive open mode of TCP IP Partner node DTn 5 MEWTOCOL Not used station number When using the Active open mode of TCP IP if the partner node has Pee no ARP function specify the Ethernet address of the partner node In Partner node any other case specify OH DTn 7 Ethernet Example To specify 1 2 3 4 5 6
237. o use it when sending e mails Proceed to Q3 want to use it when receiving e mails Proceed to Q5 want to use it when sending and receiving e mails Proceed to Q4 and Q5 NO E mail setting cannot be performed without the setup tool Configurator ET Q4 Do you have the IP address for ET LAN unit YES E mail send function can be used Set up the necessary items according to this manual NO E mails cannot be sent without the IP address Not clear Check with your e mail server administrator Q5 Does your e mail server support POP YES E mail send function can be used Set up the necessary items according to this manual NO E mails cannot be received because ET LAN e mail receive function is supported only by POP Not clear Check with your e mail server administrator Q6 Do you have the POP account and POP password for the ET LAN unit YES E mail receive function can be used Set up the necessary items according to this manual NO E mails cannot be received without the POP account and POP password Not clear Check with your e mail server administrator E mail function setting procedure using the setup tool Configurator ET Flow of e mail function setting E mail basic function Perform the server settings required for using the e mail function Concerning the necessary information ask the server administrator Perform the setting for the e mail function to be u
238. ocations The shared memory in the ET LAN unit consists of the following areas Address 0000H O1FFH 0200H O3FFH 0000H User system area 512 words Reserved 9k words O9H_ O3FFH OAH 0000H Transparent communication buffer area 6k words OFH 03FFH 10H 0000H User system area 2 2k words 11H O3FFH Note Initialization information setting area 48 words Routing information setting area 32 words Connection information setting area 128 words Initialization information notified area 16 words Conneciton information notified area 128 words Handshake area 32 words Error log area 128 words Connection 1 1k words Receive buffer for Transmission buffer for Connection 1 1k words Receive buffer for Connection 2 1k words Transmission buffer for Connection 2 1k words Receive buffer for Connection 3 1k words Transmission buffer for Connection 3 1k words OFH 0000H Ladder e mail send setting area 64 words Auto connection status confirmation area 16 words System connection information notified area 48 words E mail status area 16 words Reserved 368 words E mail error log area 512 words E mail receive log area 512 words Addresses for the above shared memory are in w
239. ocesiie is used to carry out communication processing L When data is received from the communication circuit the receive notified signal goes on 2 The size of the data to be read is written to the reception request data size parameter in the connection information setting area The receive request signal is turned on The received data is sent to the receive buffer in the shared memory The receive complete signal goes on The received data is read from the receive buffer in the shared memory The receive request signal goes off When the receive request signal has been turned off the receive complete signal goes off If the reception processing is not successfully completed for some reason the receive error signal _ goes on 9 If a reception error occurs the receive request signal goes off 4U When the receive request signal goes off the receive error signal goes off Always make sure this has been done before carrying out the reception processing again SLO LOEB ae o f When the size of the data received is greater than the receive request data size the following procedure is used to carry out communication processing 8 Even if the receive request signal goes off the receive notified signal remains on so repeat the procedure from step when the receive request signal goes on to receive the remaining data Operation when an error occurs is the same as that which occurs when the size of the d
240. of bytes comprising the MEWTOCOL COM command or message is converted to hexadecimal data and specified for the Data Size parameter The Station Number for Relay Station and Route Number for Relay Station parameters should be specified using the pertinent number If there is only one relay station the spaces for the second and third relay stations will be filled in closing the gap The station number of the station sending the command is specified for Source for MEWTOCOL station number The station number of the station receiving the command is specified for Destination for MEWTOCOL station number With commands the same value should be specified for the Hierarchy level LEVEL and Hierarchy depth DEPTH parameters With responses Hierarchy level LEVEL is fixed at OOH Destination Source MEWTOCOL station No is specified by converting to hexadecimal data g Key Point The route number is a number that is automatically allocated to differentiate units if multiple link related units are being used on the same backplane With the FP2 this applies to ET LAN units multi wire link units and computer communication units Route numbers proceed in sequential order 1 2 3 starting from the unit nearest the CPU unit I O units other than link related units and advanced function units are not included in these routes Route No 1 4 3 Route No 2 7
241. ogram E mail receive function Received e mail check function Checking received e mails Received e mails in the e mail server can be checked at the specified intervals The value for the intervals can be selected in the range of 0 to 255 min When 0 is specified received e mails are not checked Ia Reference Control Configurator ET Operational Guide Book ARCT1F341E Checking received e mails using the ladder program When the e mail receiving request flag in the shared memory turns ON received e mails in the e mail server are checked sar Reference Chapter 2 7 Receiving E mails Using the Ladder Program 11 8 Request Mail function Response Mail When the ET LAN unit receives the request e mail it sends back a response e mail to the e mail source la wal Reference Chapter 3 6 Request Mail Function What is the data value of DT100 Notification via e mail Pass xyz DT100 Sending Request e mail Notification via e mail SE Data value is 20H E Internet Receiving Response e mail DT100 tttt 20H 11 6 Security in Receiving E mails To enhance the safety in receiving e mails use the Mail Filter fucntion and a security password Flow of e mail receiving steps Received e mails are checked I There are unread e mails NO in the e mail server Completed NO Receive Filter processing OK
242. ommunication 227H Transmission buffer size for 0000H transparent communication 228H Receiving buffer starting address for FFFFH transparent communication 229H Receiving buffer size for transparent 0000H Connection communication 22AH 7 Transmission buffer starting address FFFFH for transparent communication 22BH Transmission buffer size for 0000H transparent communication 22CH Receiving buffer starting address for FFFFH transparent communication 22DH i Receiving buffer size for transparent 0000H Connection communication 22EH 8 Transmission buffer starting address FFFFH for transparent communication 22FH Transmission buffer size for 0000H transparent communication Setting value and explanation The first address in each buffer should be specified using 2800H to 3FFFH word address For the details of each setting refer to the above addresses 210H to 213H 5 10 Transparent communication buffer area allocations The transparent communication buffer area allocations connections 1 to 3 effective when the unit is shipped from the factory are as shown below The first addresses and sizes of the send and receive buffers of connections 1 to 8 can be sent to any desired values in the 6k words transparent communication buffer area by changing the contents of the initialization information settings The shared memory addresses indicated below are in word 16 bit units Shared memory Bank No Address
243. on setting area Connection information setting area Initialization information notified area Connection information notified area Handshake area Error log area Bank 0 Address 200H to 22FH Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Initialization information setting area bank 0 Address Name ee Setting value and explanation Source node IP Set value Source node address 200H address L 0000H Address example 192 168 1 1 CO A8 01 01H IP address L 0101H Source node IP IP address H COA8H 201H 0000H Any address other than 00000000H and FFFFFFFFH address H f is valid Set value 0000H Communication between networks not used Communication 0001H Communication between networks used 202H function setting 0000H Specifies whether or not communication is carried out between between networks using a router networks If communication between networks is used the routing information setting area should also be specified Source node 203H MEWTOCOL 0000H station number Set value 01H to 40H 01 to 64 Specifies the MEWTOCOL station no of the source node as a value between 01 and 64 when MEWTOCOL communication is used Specify a number that does not overlap that of any other station on the network A dummy value should be set even if MEWTOCOL communication is not being carried out 204H Sad Reserved 207H ae the 208H pence 209H If an
244. on complete signal is on any number of open processing and close processing operations can be performed By changing the setting and performing re open processing it is possible to communicate with a different partner See Chpater 5 Initialization Processing and Termination Processing See Chapter 5 Initialization Processing and Termination Processing 7 5 7 3 Settings on the PLC Side 7 3 1 Connection Information Settings A memory area such as the data registers of the programmable controller is set aside and the data to be written to the connection information area of the shared memory is specified when the open processing is carried out When using a computer link the contents of the specified data are as indicated below Command gt Zz 2 S x i SHALE Lee E ET LAN unit Contents of data settings ee Name Set value and Explanation 7 value se 1 0 0 olo o 0o olo 0o 0 olo 0 0 0 en using Set value 0000H a When using TCP IP 0000 0 000 000 0 0000 Setting area Active open DTn for application Set value 0300H being used When using TCP IP 000 0 0 011 000 olo 0 00 Fullpassive open Set value 0200H a When using TCP IP 0000 0 010 000 0 0000 Unpassive open DTn 1 Source node Specify any port number other than OH port No A value of 8000 1F40 or higher is recommended Partner node Specify the IP address of the part
245. onnection 5 information notified block Connection 6 information notified block Connection 7 information notified block Connection 8 information notified block The connection information setting area consists of eight blocks to match the number of connections The offset address contents from the table in the next page are allocated for the various connections Program example This program uses an ET LAN installed in slot no 0 as shown below and reads the connection information for connection 1 Source node ET LAN unit Slot No F150 READ H 0 H 2E0 K 16 DT 200 Slot No 0 Bank No 00H Shared memory reading First address Shared memory reading No of words Destination where read data is stored first address in memory area 6 12 Partner node g Key Point Offset addresses 0 to 4 are stored after open processing has been completed Offset addresses A to F are stored after communication processing has been completed when using the transparent communication function Offset address Offset Name Stored value and Explanation address Stored value 0 Open processing has been completed successfully Open processing Other than 0 E d h dedi 0 complete code er than 0 Error co e w en open processing ended in an error If re open processing is carried out the results are overwritten connections 1 to 8 Error codes are
246. ons 1 to 3 is effective and no error occurs Flashing When an error occurs in any System connection System connection 1 2 or 3 OFF When System connections 1 to 3 are not connected amp C Reference Chapter 2 1 2 LED Operation Status 10 25 10 2 4 Reading system connection information settings The current settings of the system connection can be read from the shared memory Read the necessary data from the system connection information setting area Bank 10H Addresses 050H to 07FH Shared memory 2k words User system area 2 Ladder send e mail setup area Auto connection status check area E mail status area Reserved E mail error log area E mail send log area E mail receive log area System connection informa tion notified area Addresses a 050H to System connection 1 gt OSFH information notified block EEE Bank 10H 060H to System connection 2 Addresses O6FH information notified block _050H toO7FH 970H to System connection 3 O7FH information notified block Shared memory addresses are allocated in word 16 bit units The system connection area consists of three blocks to match the number of connections The offset address contents as shown below are allocated for the various connections System connection information notified block Bank 10H Addresses 050H to 07FH Cee Name Stored
247. ons being used the system configuration and the window size For the processing tome of the partner node please refer to the instruction manual and other documentation for that particular device MEWTOCOL communication This is a guide to the transmission processing time when the computer is issuing commands and the ET LAN unit is returning responses It indicates the time from the point that the ET LAN unit receives the command to when it sends the response Computer ET LAN heen TE aol al LV E3 __ Command ae a A rt ACK __ pe Transmission pree Response ___ _ processing oe time een ACK Transmission processing time when using the computer link function PLC being Communication Transmission processing time calculation formula used processing method FP2 CPU Read contact data 0 032 x no of command and response data bytes 4 8 RD RCS command CPU scan time ms Write contact data 0 046 x no of command and response data bytes 4 3 WD WCS command CPU scan time ms FP2SH Read contact data 0 015 x no of command and response data bytes 8 7 CPU RD RCS command CPU scan time ms Write contact data 0 022 x no of command and response data bytes 6 4 CPU scan time ms Transmission processing time when using the data transmission function PLC being Communication Transmission processing time calculation formula used processing method FP2 CPU Read contact data 0 00
248. or ALM ALM CPU fault Unit normal 100B 100B 100BASE TX operation Other mode in operation 10BT 10BT 10BASE T operation Other mode in operation 10B5 10BASE5 operation Other mode in operation 12V z 12 V power supply on 12 V power supply off RMT RMT Reserved Reserved Reserved 2 1 3 Mode Setting Switch OLY V Factory settings All off position Switch No Off On 1 100BASE TX 10BASE T 7 10BASE5 2 Auto connection function is not available Auto connection function is available 3 Normal mode Test mode 4 Test mode 1 Test mode 2 7 Note1 Switching between 100BASE TX and 10BASE T is done automatically by auto negotiation function Always turn it off when using AFP27901 Note2 Invalid when the switch 3 is off g Key Point The settings of the mode setting switches become effective at the point when the power supply is turned on 2 3 2 2 Connector Pin Layout 2 2 1 10BASE5 AUI Connector with D SUB 15 pins retainer 2 2 2 100BASE TX 10BASE T Connector RJ45 8 Pin No Signal name Pin No Signal name 1 Signal shield 9 COL 2 COL 10 TX 3 TX 11 Signal shield 4 Signal shield 12 RX 5 RX 13 12V DC 6 GND 14 Power supply shield 7 Not used 15 Not used 8 Signal shield Shell F G Pin No Signal name 1 TX 2 TX 3 RX 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 RX 7 Not used 8 Not used 2 2 3 External Power Supply Terminal for
249. ord 16 bit units The allocations connections 1 to 3 for the transparent communication buffer area shown above show the statuses in effect when the unit is shipped from the factory The first addresses and sizes of the transmission and receiving buffers for connections 1 to 8 can be changed to any desired values in the transparent communication buffer area 6k words by changing the contents of the initialization information settings 4 3 2 The Roles Played by the Various Areas Initialization information setting area lt Addresses 200H to 22FH gt These are used in the initialization processing of the ET LAN unit These specify basic information such as the addresses and node numbers of source stations and the re send setting time for the TCP These are also used to specify the area settings for the communication buffer used for transparent communication Routing information setting area lt Addresses 230H to 24FH gt These are used in the initialization processing of the ET LAN unit These are specified when communication is being carried out from the ET LAN unit with a node on an Ethernet through a router These are used to specify router IP addresses and sub network masks These do not need to be set if communication is being carried out only on the network to which the source station is connected Connection information setting area lt Addresses 250H to 2CFH gt These are used for open processing of the
250. oute No 2 8 14 Example of communication data Other hierarchy communication Source Command message Fixed value H Station No 10 AH Same 00H Command Response hierarchy Data block size 7 Data sze L message message Data size H 02H Route No Fixed value Relay Header block Link unit gt Level and depth C f hierarch Station No 11 0BH of hierarchy Route No 2 3 Station No for relay station 1 Rel ej j Destination station number elay c S l a station 2 z z Source station number a E Route No for relay station 1 t Other Station No gt hierarchy MEWTOCOL DAT 12 Oen Data 4 MEWTOCOL DAT command data block block Route No 2 3 Relay z e station 3 4 iz ad Command message Station No 10H Fixed value 13 ODH C Data block size Data size L 5 Destination z a a Fixed value Station No 14 OEH Header Level and depth block of hierarchy C Station No for relay station 1 Station No for relay station 2 Station No for relay station 3 Destination station number Source station number Route No for relay station 1 Route No for relay station 2 Route No for relay station 3 7 Dala MEWTOCOL DAT block MEWTOCOL DAT command data block When accessing CPU2 Other hierarchy communication Response message Data size L Data size H MEWTOCOL DAT response data block When accessing CPU4 Other hierarchy communication
251. parately for each See Chapter 6 Open Processing and Close connection Processing Communication processing is executed through the ladder program Communication processing is carried out by reading data from and writing it to the communica tion buffer and by using communication requests Communication can be carried out with up to 8 connections altogether in conjunction with computer linking and data transfer mw iw _ Close processing separately for each See Chapter 6 Open Processing and Close connection Processing Termination process es f ing separately for See Chapter 5 Initialization Processing and each unit Termination Processing Initialization Open Close Termination processing processing processing processing processing Initialization request signal Initialization complete signal Open request signal separately for each connection Ee lt T Open complete signal separately for each connection Note When the initialization complete signal is on any number of open processing and close processing operations can be performed By changing the setting and performing re open processing it is possible to communicate with a different partner 9 3 9 3 Settings on the PLC Side 9 3 1 Connection Information Settings A memory area such as the data registers of the programmable controller is set aside and the data to be written t
252. pecified for To Address No 32 is specified for Cc and Address No 6 is specified for Bcc 4 55 on Feb 3 Registered No 3 U ooon Oa zD 0000 000 DEE ET v 0026H 0000 0020 0000 B 0000 0000 aa Address No 1 for To Address No 32 for Cc Address No 6 for Bec Example of reading the e mail receive log area Bank 11H Addresses 200H to 3FFH Latest Receive log block PLCS ed Memory Displa Untitle1 x Bank No 17 Cursor Address 7465 7374 6574 4061 6161 2E62 SF6D 6262 6169 2E63 6CSF 0000 Y etlan2 mail_ test aaa bbb c l Receive log block 0458 7465 0203 7374 6574 4061 6C61 6161 6E31 2E62 SF6D 6262 6169 2E63 6CSF 0000 X etlanl mail_ te st aaa bbb c Older Detalls of the block 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 oo00 NE Close Rear Address OOOO
253. processing when using TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol TCP is a type of connection protocol in which it is necessary to open mutual connections between the source and partner nodes before communication processing can be carried out There are three ways to open a connection as described on the following page With the ET LAN unit the method of opening the connection is specified by writing a value to the shared memory Open processing when using UDP IP User Datagram Protocol UDP is a protocol in which connections are not used Data can be transferred simply by specifying the IP address of the partner node and the number of the port being used so no mutual connections need to be opened With the ET LAN unit however open processing is necessary in order to specify the application the number of the port being used and the IP address aS ne Note If connections have been functionally opened for both the source and partner nodes active connections are open or if the connections between the source and partner nodes are passively open Fullpassive open or Unpassive open no connection is opened between the nodes when open processing is carried out Fullpassive open Passive connection open The system is waiting for data to be received from a given partner node in order to establish a connection In the Fullpassive open method the IP address and port number of the partner node are specified and then the system waits
254. product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on It could lead to an electric shock Copyright Trademarks This manual and its contents are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Zerox Co Ltd And XeroxCorp All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners PLC_ORG_ET Table of Contents Compatibility with the FP3 Difference between AFP2790 and AFP27901 1 Unit Functions and ReStrictions cccccccscseeccecceeeeeseeseeseeeeeseeseeeeeees 1 1 1 1 Features and Structure of ET LAN Uniit cccsssecssseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeneeeeseeeeeseaeseseenen
255. puters registered data will overwrite previously registered data starting from the latest item so that different data will end up being monitored g Key Point Monitor commands are used to execute monitoring after the contacts and data to be monitored have been registered on the PLC side If using the FP2SH CPU unit the above restrictions apply for up to 10 connections Chapter 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 1 Names and Functions of Parts 2 1 1 Names and Functions of Parts ETI EA s 1 Operating status LEDs AM 5 Mode setting switch 10BASES5 AUI connector with D SUB 15 pins retainer T O 100BASE TX 10BASE T connector RJ45 T O 100BASE TX 10BASE T connector RJ45 E External power supply terminal for 10BASE5 12 V DC Operating status LEDs These display the operating status of the unit such as connection and communication conditions and error statuses 2 10BASE5 AUI connector When an Ethernet 10BASE5 is being used this connector is used to connect the ET LAN unit and the transceiver using a transceiver cable 3 100BASE TX 10BASE T connector RJ45 When an Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T is being used this connector is used to connect the ET LAN unit and the hub using a UTP cable 4 External power supply terminal for 10BASE5 12 V DC When an Ethernet 10BASES5 is being used this terminal supplies power to the t
256. r Open method MEWTOCOL communication DT20 TCP IP Active open Open processing DT21 Source node port No 8000 Partner node IP address 192 168 1 2 DT22 to DT2 nee COA80102H DT24 Partner node port No 8000 Program example R9010 Initialization error signal Mmkaiization pulse relay H P150 PREAD HO H2D0 K1 Initialization error signal R9013 H Fo mv H1 DT 20 Jherereerseresreesre Initialization pulse relay Fo MV K 8000 DT21 sseesaesnanaassecnecsaes F1 DMV H C0A80102 DT 22 Jessssessseeessseeene F0 Mv K 8000 DT 24 Jrovsseseeesnsesneene F151WRT HO DT20 K5 H250 P RC R11 R50 a Open error signal Initialization complete signal R11 P150 PREAD HO H2E0 Open error signal K1 F150READ HO H360 H2 WRO Je Always on relay Complete signal area F151 WRT HO WR4 H2 H368 Request R9013 signal area HF1 omv HC0A80101 DT10 Initialization pulse relay Fo Mmv HO DT12 o Fo MV H1 DT 13 iain ii F151 WRT HO DT10 K4 H200 e R9014 RD R4C Initialization request signal eese Allocation of complete signal area RO to R1F Allocation of handshake area for internal relays sates Allocation of request signal area R40 to R5F Source node IP address 192 168 1 1 COA80101H Communication between networks not used Dummy setting source node MEWTOCOL station no Writing to initializatio information setting area Initialization pro
257. r 2 00 or later of ET LAN unit 10 2 Auto open processing When the auto connection function is ON Setting mode switch 2 is ON and a check mark is not placed in The connection 1 to 8 are set by ladder program check box with the dedicated setup tool Configurator ET the auto open processing is valid See the window below At this time open processing of the connection is automatically performed The open processing by the ladder program is invalid A Reference Chapter 10 1 3 Auto Open Processing Setup window with the setup tool Configurator ET EI Untitle Configurator ET File Unit Settings Mail Settings View Online Option Help Oe SQ S 44 2 ET LAN Unit J hitialization Settings Connection T The connection 1 to 8 are set by ladder program Tnformation hitialize System Connection Settings Connection Settings E Mail Settings Communication method GP IP Help Open method in the TCP IP Active Grmmunination funetion MEWwTOGOI System connection open processing When the auto connection function is ON Setting mode switch 2 is ON the auto processing of the system connection is performed amp Reference 10 2 2 Open processing in the system connection Initialization processing by the ladder program When the auto connection function is OFF Setting mode switch 2 is OFF the initialization processing is performed by the ladder program At this time
258. r case communication with the destination node is carried out through the default router gateway if the destination node is located in networks A to C in the illustration a Key Point The network sub network addresses of the five routers Router 1 to 5 on the source network are Soe along with the IP addresses The network Ssub network addresses are the network sub network addresses of the adjacent networks connected through the routers 2 An IP address is registered for only one default router gateway The default router gateway may be the same as one of the five routers Router 1 to 5 specified in step 1 or it may be different 5 3 Reading Initialization Information The initialization information subsequent to the initialization processing of the current unit can be read from the shared memory The initialization information notified area Bank 0 Addresses 2DOH to 2DFH should be read using the shared memory read instruction F150 READ and P150 PREAD Shared memory Initialization information setting area Routing information setting area User system area Connection information setting area Initialization information notified area Bank 0 Address 2D0H to 2DFH Connection information notified area Handshake area Error log area Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Initialization information notified area bank 0
259. r program example Reception DT210 Receive request data size 7024 words processing DT260 i request data 7024 words Taneman Transmission processin processing DT261 p g complete data size DT265 Transmission error code Transmission processing After the data being transmitted has been written to the transmission buffer of the shared memory the following program is run E F150READ HO H360 H2 WRO ee p Always on Complete relay signal area F151 WRT HO WR4 H2 H368 pepe Request R100 signal area H Fo MV K1024 DT260 PERE IAEE O R10 R2 m ke 1 Transmission complete signal Open complete signal Initialization complete signal 1 gt P151 PWRT HO DT260 H1 H25F aang aN RC R10 R2 R42 _ lt SET gt 4 ransmission complete signal Transmission Open complete signal request signal Initialization complete signal R2 R42 lt RST gt Transmission request signal Transmissjon complete signal Transmission error signal R2 E P150 PREAD HO H2EF K1 DT 261 4 Transmission complete signal R3 P150 PREAD HO H2EE K1 DT 265 ee Transmission error signal Allocation of complete signal area RO to R1F Allocation of handshake area for internal Allocation of request signal area R40 to RSF realys Setting of transmission request data size Transmission request data size is written Conditions I
260. ransceiver When an Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T is being used this terminal is not used Mode setting switch These are used to select the communication interface and the test mode for the Ethernet 2 1 2 Operating Status LEDs ET1 ET2 1I I I 8 1 I 8 ROY TX RXTEST E1 E2 ALM RDY TX RX TEST E1 E2 ALM 1008 108T 108512V RMT 100B 10BT RMT E F On Flashing Off 1 1 Connection 1 connected Connection 1 fault Connection 1 not connected 2 2 Connection 2 connected Connection 2 fault Connection 2 not connected 3 3 Connection 3 connected Connection 3 fault Connection 3 not connected 4 4 Connection 4 connected Connection 4 fault Connection 4 not connected 5 5 Connection 5 connected Connection 5 fault Connection 5 not connected 6 6 Connection 6 connected Connection 6 fault Connection 6 not connected 7 7 Connection 7 connected Connection 7 fault Connection 7 not connected 8 8 Connection 8 connected Connection 8 fault Connection 8 not connected RDY rpy Mialization complete z Initialization not complete communication ready status TX TX Transmitting Not transmitting RX RX Receiving Not receiving TEST TEST Test mode Normal mode E1 E1 Initialization processing error Recovery possible error Warning error System error Mail transmission an Normal operation E2 E2 Hardware error Mail reception error MEWTOCOL error Auto connection err
261. red memory writing instructions F151 WRT and P151 PWRT Shared memory address Address 250H to Connection 1 information setting block 25FH 260H to Connection 2 information setting block erage se n 26FH Initialization information 270H setting area to Connection 3 information setting block Routing information setting SEO area 5 Bank 0 to Connection 4 information setting block User system Connection information 28FH ooo O area setting area Address e Initialization information 250H to 2CFH BA Connection 5 information setting block notified area 20H S CC SS Connection information to Connection 6 information setting block notified area Soa Handshake area Ap Connection 7 information setting block 2C0H Error log area to Connection 8 information setting block 2CFH Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Program example If using connection 1 of the ET LAN unit installed in slot no 0 the program for writing data to the shared memory would be as follows H F151 WRT H0 DT n K6 H250 Slot No 0 7 Bank No 00H Destination in which data is stored first address of memory area Writing to shared memory No of words Writing to shared memory First address g Key Point The slot number and bank number to be used by the shared memory writing instructions F151 WRT and P151 PWRT are specified as follows 1514131211109 876543210 et
262. request signal Connection 2 bit 4 Receive request signal Connection 2 bit 5 bit 5 bit 6 Transmission request signal Connection 2 bit 6 Transmission request signal Connection 2 bit 7 bit 7 bit 8 Receive request signal Connection 3 bit 8 Receive request signal Connection 3 bit 9 bit 9 bit A Transmission request signal Connection 3 bit A Transmission request signal Connection 3 bit B bit B bit C Initialization request signal bit C Receive request signal Connection 4 bit D bit D bit E Error LED flash off signal See note bit E Transmission request signal Connection 4 bit F Error log notified request signal bit F 369H bit 0 Open request signal Connection 1 36DH bit 0 Receive request signal Connection 5 bit 1 bit 1 bit 2 Open request signal Connection 2 bit 2 Transmission request signal Connection 5 bit 3 bit 3 bit 4 Open request signal Connection 3 bit 4 Receive request signal Connection 6 bit 5 bit 5 bit 6 Open request signal Connection 4 bit 6 Transmission request signal Connection 6 bit 7 bit 7 bit 8 Open request signal Connection 5 bit 8 Receive request signal Connection 7 bit 9 bit 9 bit A Open request signal Connection 6 bit A Transmission request signal Connection 7 bit B bit B bit C Open request signal Connection 7 bit C Receive request signal Connection 8 bit D bit D
263. request signal area Bank 0 Address Description 36AH bit2 E mail send request signal 11 15 Time chart for e mail send processing Shared memory accessing Next signal processing E mail send request signal Ladder program processing E mail send complete signal E mail send error signal i gt r le ET LAN unit E mail send _ processing v a bA Ss Z L w c D amp n a Q O ao Procedure to send e mails 1 Write the data that you wish to send via e mail in the ladder send e mail setting area Qq K Reference Chapter 3 7 2 Ladder Send E mail Settings 2 The e mail send request signal is turned ON 3 When the e mail send processing from the ET LAN unit to the e mail server is completed successfully the e mail send complete signal is turned ON 4 After confirming that the e mail send complete signal is ON the e mail send request signal should be turned OFF 5 When the e mail send request signal has been turned OFF the e mail send complete signal is turned OFF 6 If the e mail send processing is not successfully completed in some reason the e mail send error signal is turned ON 7 Before conducting the e mail resend processing be sure to turn OFF the e mail send request signal at first 8 When the e mail send request signal is turned OFF the e mail send error signal is turned OFF To conduct the e mail resend processi
264. response data block Max 2048 bytes The number of bytes comprising the MEWTOCOL COM command or message is converted to hexadecimal data and specified for the Data Size parameter The station number of the station sending the command is specified for Source for MEWTOCOL station number The station number of the station receiving the command is specified for Destination for MEWTOCOL station number 00H should be specified for both Hierarchy level LEVEL and Hierarchy depth DEPTH Destination Source MEWTOCOL station No is specified by converting to hexadecimal data 7 12 Example of communication data Same hierarchy communication Source Station No 10 AH Command message Response message Route No 3 Link unit Link unit eo Station No 12 OCH Route No Link unit e lt Link unit gt Station No 13 ODH E 53 x r Station No 14 OEH When accessing CPU1 Same hierarchy communication Command message H Fixed value C Same hierarchy i Data size L Data block size E Data size H Header Fixed value block Leveland depth OOH __ station number Source station number Data block MEWTOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM command data block Other hierarchy Response message Data size L Data size H MEWTOCOL COM response data block 7 13 7 4 2 Communication Data Format
265. ress 1to5 IP address Note When the auto connection function is valid the initialization processing can be set only with the Configurator ET The initialization processing cannot be set with the ladder program At this time the termination processing cannot be conducted P D Reference Setup procedure Control Configurator ET Operational Guide Book ARCT1F341E Setting items Initialization information notified area in Chapter 5 Reading the initialization information Initialization information notified area in Chapter 5 I O handshake and shared memory handshake Chapter 4 4 Handshake Method 10 6 10 1 3 Auto Open Processing What is Auto open processing Based on the information set by the setup tool Configurator ET the open processing is automatically conducted to each connection of the ET LAN unit when the power is supplied When using the auto open processing open processing for each connection by the ladder program is not necessary In the auto open processing open information for each connection as shown below is set using the setup tool Configurator ET Before using the auto open processing confirm that the auto connection function is ON and a check mark is not placed in The connection 1 to 8 are set by ladder program check box Auto open processing is valid The check mark is not placed in this check box in the initial setting Setup window with the setup too
266. ress Destination node port No Destination node MEW station number Destination node Ethernet address Connection closing time min Number of re open set times ee Note When the auto open processing is valid the open processing using the ladder program is invalid Only the settings set by the Configurator ET is valid At this time the close processing cannot be conducted When the auto open processing is valid by not selecting the check box for The connection 1 to 8 are set by ladder program using the Configurator ET the auto open processing is applied to all connections Therefore the open processing cannot be set to Valid or Invalid for each connection using the ladder program 10 7 10 1 4 Auto Connection Information Settings Necessary data is set for the auto connection information setting items using the dedicated setup tool Configurator ET For the connection to be used set the connection information settings as shown below Settings for up to 8 connections can be conducted Auto connection information setting item Name Setting value Description Default Connection For the current connection settings Valid or Invalid can be Invalid valid invalid selected When Invalid is selected the open processing is not selection performed in the connection x Communica Specify whether TCP IP is used or UDP IP is used
267. ress cannot be allocated to the socket close sno return ERROR 16 4 Requests connection to partner node DstAddr sin_family AF_INET DstAddr sin_addr s_addr inet_addr D_DST_IP DstAddr sin_port htons D_DST_PORT if err connect sno struct sockaddr amp DstAddr sizeof DstAddr lt 0 Connection with partner node could not be established close sno return ERROR return OK Return OK Successfully completed ERROR Error occurred processing terminated int MewtocolSample LMenu Sample Menu puts 0 Clear Data puts 1 Set Data puts E End Test printf Please Push Key 0 or 1 or E for 3 switch getchar case 0 printf Clear Data if MewtocolSendAndReceive lt 01 WDD00000000000000 return ERROR break printf Set Data if MewtocolSendAndReceive lt 01 WDDOO00Q000000FFFF return ERROR break case E case e puts Bye Bye return OK case n break default puts Bad Command goto LMenu 16 5 Input unsigned char cmd MEWTOCOL command being sent Return OK Successfully completed ERROR Error occurred processing terminated int MewtocolSendAndReceive cmd unsigned char 16 6 int len int sendsize recvsize int senddatasize int err len strlen cmd Size of actua
268. ress error With UDP IP 0 was set for the the partner node Open partner node IP address processing OH or FFFFFFFFH was set for end code the partner node IP address in a mode other than TCP IP There are also Unpassive stored in offset 8015H UDP IP source The same source node port Specify a different source address 0 of the node port number was set in UDP IP as node port number open processing number that of a source node port that end code of the duplication error is already open connection 8016H TCP IP source The same source node port Specify a different source information notified node port number was set in TCP IP as node port number area number that of a source node port that duplication error is already open 8017H Memory error The connection cannot be Run the open processing opened because not enough again If the error still memory is available occurs run the initialization processing once again 8018H Nopartner node The connection cannot be Check the transmission error opened because the line connection the IP transmission destination of the address of the partner specified partner node IP node and the port number address and port number of the partner node cannot be found or a communication error occurred 801AH Forced close The connection was forcibly Turn the initialization error closed because the initialization request complete signal off request signal went off after close processing has been completed
269. resses are registered in the routing information setting area c3 ET LAN unit Source network Network address P P x x u IP address eal IP address Ea IP address Ea IP address P P P1 PI 2 ppp2p2 3_ PPP3P3 4 pppsp4 Router IP addresses are registered in the routing information setting area Router Ip address Other network 1 0 Network address Other network 2 Network address RRxx Other network 3 a _ Network address S S xx Other network 4 Node Network address T T xx Other network 5 Network address U U x x Network addresses for rN adjacent networks connected through the routers are registered in the routing information setting tng ea s To any desired network If the destination node exists in any of the lt Other networks 1 to 5 gt noted above the ET LAN unit communicates with the node through routers 1 to 5 In this case the network sub network address of the destination node will match the Network sub network address of the destination node will match the Network sub network address of one of the five routers registered in the routing information setting area Refer to the IP addresses for the five routers Router 1 to 5 in the illustration and to the network addresses for the five networks Network 1 to 5 In any othe
270. riting of contact information D2H 53H Reading of contact information D3H Note The corresponding response code is a value that is the reverse of the first bit 0 1 of the command code 1 byte binary code The end code for a normal response is FFH while that when an error occurs is an error code See MEWTOCOL Error Codes on Chapter 14 3 14 26 14 2 2 List of MEWTOCOL DAT Commands 50H Write data area The specified number of words of data are written starting from the specified first word number of the data area Command T T No of specified 80H 50H Areacode Starting word No onis A x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 x163 x162 lower word higher word lower word higher word Writing data 1 Writing data n x161 x160 x163 x162 x161 x160 x163 x162 L L lower word higher word lower word higher word Writing data n items For communication with the ET LAN or MEWNET H MEWNET W2 network n 1 to 10 For communication with the MEWNET P MEWNET W network n 1 to 16 Normal response Write successful 80H DOH FFH Error response Write error 80H DOH Error code Area code Area type Area code Link relay WL 00 Internal relay WR 01 External output relay WY 02 External input relay WX 03 Timer counter set value area SV 04 Timer counter elapsed value area EV 05 Link data register
271. rocessing processing processing processing processing Initialization request signal Initialization complete signal Open request signal separately for each connection Open complete signal separately for each connection Note When the initialization complete signal is on any number of open processing and close processing operations can be performed By changing the setting and performing re open processing it is possible to communicate with a different partner 5 3 5 2 Processing Procedures 5 2 1 An Overview of the Initialization Processing Procedure The unit is initialized and booted using the following procedure 1 The necessary data is written to the initialization information setting area Bank 0 Addresses 200H to 22FH in the shared memory 2 If communication is to be carried out between networks the necessary data is written to the routing information setting area Bank 0 Addresses 230H to 24FH in the shared memory 3 The initialization request signal is turned on Handshake method Initialization request signal bit When I O is used for handshake Y2C Bank 0 When shared memory is used for handshake Address 368H Bit C The initialization request signal should be kept on unit termination processing is carried out 4 Check to make sure the initialization complete signal is on Handshake method Initialization request signal bit When I O is used
272. router See other networks A B C etc in the left illustration The router may be one of the five routers specified at 1 or may be a different router 1 2 Overview of ET LAN Unit Functions 1 2 1 Function Model The functions of the ET LAN unit are shown in the diagram below I O and shared memory are used for the interface to the user program CPU unit A maximum of eight simultaneous connections are possible for each of the computer link data transfer and transparent communication functions CPU Ladder program Shared memory O Ti t System communication area buffer Interface OO J MEWTOCOL communications Other S _ A _ nodes Z Computer link Data transfer Transparent N J _communications_ _communications_ _communications i w Transport layer TCP UDP Network layer IP ICMP ARP Data link layer IEEE 802 3 802 3 u Physical layer 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 AUI Ethernet LAN m The layers beneath the transport layer of the ET LAN unit provide the following communication services TCP Transmission Control Protocol TCP is a connection based communication method which provides the virtual circuit In the TCP communication method since communication services including re transmission sequence and flow control for the communication data are provided high communication reliability is guaranteed at the protocol level UDP User Data
273. rror signal Connection 1 X13 Open error signal Connection 2 X4 Receive notified signal Connection 2 X14 Open complete signal Connection 3 X5 Receive complete signal Connection 2 X15 Open error signal Connection 3 X6 Transmission complete signal Connection 2 X16 Open complete signal Connection 4 X7 Transmission error signal Connection 2 X17 Open error signal Connection 4 X8 Receive notified signal Connection 3 X18 Open complete signal Connection 5 X9 Receive complete signal Connection 3 X19 Open error signal Connection 5 XA Transmission complete signal Connection 3 X1A Open complete signal Connection 6 XB Transmission error signal Connection 3 X1B Open error signal Connection 6 XC Initialization complete signal X1C Open complete signal Connection 7 XD Initialization error signal X1D Open error signal Connection 7 XE X1E Open complete signal Connection 8 XF Error log notified complete signal X1F Open error signal Connection 8 Output Relay numbers indicate the numbers when installed in slot no 0 No Description No Description Y20 Receive request signal Connection 1 Y30 Open request signal Connection 1 Y21 Y31 Y22 Transmission request signal Connection 1 Y32 Open request signal Connection 2 Y23 Y33 Y24 Receive request signal Connection 2 Y34 Open request signal Connection 3 Y25 Y35 Y26 Transmission request signal Connection 2 Y36
274. s Offset address Offset Name Stored value and explanation address 0 Open processing Stored value 0 Open processing has been completed successfully complete code Other than 0 Error code when open processing ended in an error connections 1 to 8 If re open processing is carried out the results are overwritten Error codes are also stored in the error log area 1 Source node port No Stored value Source node port numbers for various connections after connections 1 to 8 open processing has been completed The value is not valid until open processing has been completed successfully 2 Partner node IP address Stored value Partner node IP addresses for various connections after L open processing has been completed connections 1 to 8 The value is not valid until open processing has been completed 3 Partner node IP address successfully H connections 1 to 8 4 Partner node port No Stored value Partner node IP port numbers for various connections after connections 1 to 8 open processing has been completed The value is not valid until open processing has been completed successfully 5 Partner node Stored value Partner node MEWTOCOL station numbers for various MEWTOCOL station No connections after open processing has been completed connections 1 to 8 The value is not valid until open processing has been completed successfully 6to9 Reserved Used by the system 15 15
275. s Record of changes Manual No Date Description of changes ARCT1F322E APR 2001 First edition ACG M322E ARCT1F322E 1 NOV 2001 Second edition ACG M322E 1 Chapter12 Page12 5 12 10 12 11to12 13 corrected Pagel 2 25 12 28 corrected ARCT1F322E 2 NOV 2006 Third edition ACG M322E 2 ARCT1F322E 3 NOV 2008 Fourth edition ACG M322E 3 Change in Corporate name ARCT1F322E 4 NOV 2009 Fifth edition ACG M322E 4 Addition of ET LAN2 Unit AFP27901 Addition of ARCT1F370E 2 Additional vertion ARCT1F322E 5 AUG 2011 Sixth edition Change in Corporate name ARCT1F322E 6 MAY 2013 Seventh edition ARCT1F322E 7 DEC 2013 Eighth edition Please contact Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd E Overseas Sales Division Head Office 2431 1 Ushiyama cho Kasugai shi Aichi 486 0901 Japan E Telephone 81 568 33 7861 W Facsimile 81 568 33 8591 panasonic net id pidsx global About our sale network please visit our website Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd 2013 December 2013 PRINTED IN JAPAN ARCT1F322E 7
276. s 9 16 9 5 2 Sample Program lt Transmission Processing and Reception Processing gt 9 18 9 5 3 Sample Program lt Reception to TranSMiSSiON gt cccccceseeceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeees 9 21 10 AUTO Connection wiitscicecccncitencersstsctaccteuscansnesanancedecnesandsenancncusndecudssnanaues 10 1 10 1 Auto Connection FUNCtion ccccsscccsseeeeseeeeeseseseeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeeeseeeseeeseseaeenseeeeenees 10 2 10 1 1 Reading Auto Connection Status Information cccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 10 5 10 1 2 Auto Initialization Processing ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeaees 10 6 10 13 Auto Open Processing isis fei i aerea a tet aea ea Aee E EE EAA a ai ERE A E EA Tania 10 7 10 1 4 Auto Connection Information Settings seeseesesesesseeiesresrresrresrnssrinsrinsrinsrnnnrne e 10 8 10 1 5 Reading Auto Connection Information ssseseseseessieerrssresresrresrinsrinsrinsrinsrinnrnee 10 9 1054 6 Sample Programm sasccredicspveccdasadeadschhdsct ctuacaedicueevtcvassehed ccepesceetusdhad iateavhocensgheg o deeasene 10 11 10 2 System CONNECHION o 05 ccceecesscesecenect cc cenccciede cedetewerccccezceeds diceedecbeseccsedeceteatieedeudececetees 10 23 10 2 1 Initialization processing in the system CONNECTION eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeenes 10 23 10 2 2 Open processing in the system CONNECTION cceeeceeeteeeeeeceeeeeteaeeeeaeeteneeenaees 10
277. s XYZ123 J EE RDDOO000100011 Necessary settings for the e mail to be sent 1 Subject Enter Request here 2 Password Enter Pass A A A for the first line of the message body In succession to Pass enter the security password XYZ123 in the example above which is specified in Receive Option of the Configurator ET and finally press the Enter key When the security password is not set press the Enter key just after entering Pass 3 MEWTOCOL command Enter the MEWTOCOL COM command for the 2nd line of the message body For BCC enter asterisks gt Reference For details concerning MEWTOCOL command refer to Chapter 12 cS Note When entering MEWTOCOL COM command the response must not be multiframe If the response is multiframe the error message as shown below is written in the Response Mail and sent back to the computer No good multi frame Upper lower case characters and a space indicated as o here are discriminated when entering them in the Subject column and using them for a password OK Request NG request REQUEST Reqouest Requesto and so on 11 13 Format of Response Mail Sent from a programmable controller E mail to be sent back from the ET LAN unit is as follows Example of a Response Mail Date Thu 24 Jan 2002 19 20 28
278. s been successfully completed 9 Reserved Reserved Used in the system 10 9 Offset TAE Name Stored value Explanation A Transparent receive Stored value processing complete 0 Receive processing has been completed successfully code Other than 0 Error code stored when the receive processing ended in an Connections 1 to 8 error Results are overwritten when receive processing is conducted again Error codes are also stored in the error log area B Transparent receive Stored value unnotified data size Size of the transparent receive data remaining in the ET LAN unit in byte units Connections 1 to 8 Receive processing for this amount of data is finished successfully and receive requests will be accepted even if the connection is closed C Transparent receive Stored value unnotified data size Copy of the size of the transparent receive data remaining in the ET LAN unit copy in byte units Connections 1 to 8 The same value as the transparent receive unnotified data size above is stored When the two values match the size of the transparent receive data will be fixed so after they match send a receive request using this value D Transparent receive Stored value notified data size Size of the data actually received for the receive request in transparent Connections 1 to 8 communication in byte units It is not possible for this value to be notified as exceeding the receive r
279. s ignored when MEWTOCOL communication is not used Destination Specify this address if the destination node has no ARP 00 00 00 00 node Ethernet functions under the condition that TCP Active open is used address Connection When no communication is performed by the partner within the 0 closing time time specified here the connection is closed min When the set value is 0 the connection is not closed Number of re Specify the number of times that re open is to be conducted 0 open times After the specified times are satisfied an error is issued A connector in which the error is issued cannot be used Users can select the number of re open times from among 0 to 254 or infinite number of times When the set value is 0 re open is not performed When the set value is 255 or higher re open is performed infinitely ae Note 1 Open method When Active is selected re open is performed every 5 to 10 seconds 2 The number noted above is indicated in decimal number For the hexadecimal numbers H is added after the number amp D Reference For details on each setting refer to Chapter 6 Open Processing and Close 10 8 Processing 10 1 5 Reading Auto Connection Information When the auto connection is valid the auto connection information can be read in the same block as the connection information notified block of the conventional connection information notified area Bank 0 Addresses 2E0H to 35FH Add
280. s turned ON flashing of the LEDs for E1 and E2 turns off Also while the ERR LED flashing off signal 68H bit E is ON the LEDs for E1 and E2 will not flash even if a recoverable error or a warning error occurs However these functions are not affected by error log processing so the error contents remain in the log 15 22 be used Error log area Bank 0 Initialization information setting area Shared memory Routing information setting area User system area Connection information setting area Initialization information notified area Connection information notified area Handshake area Error log area Bank 0 Address 380H to 3FFH Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Address Name Explanation 380H Log mode Set value Default 0003H The recorded error differs depending on the set value A Available N A Not available Set value 0 1 2 3 System error A A A A Recovery possible error N A A A A Warning error N A N A A A Access error N A N A N A A pointer 381H Log block reading Set value Offset from latest log block of log buffer Default 0000H To read the latest log block O is specified To read the oldest log block used Number of log blocks used 1 is specified see 387H below This value should be set such that the number of log blocks used is greater
281. sage and sending of response message ET LAN unit When data is being sent from a programmable controller to a computer the reception of the MEWTOCOL DAT command message and the sending of the response message are handled on the computer side Reception of command ET LAN unit message and sending of response message When data is being sent from a computer to a PLC the MEWTOCOL DAT command message is sent to the partner node programmable controller which automatically sends back a response message MEWTOCOL DAT commands Command code command Functions name 50H Write word data The specified number of words of data are written starting from the specified first word number in the data area 51H Read word area The specified number of words of data are read starting from the specified first word number in the data area 52H Write contact Data is written to the specified relay of the relay area information 53H Read contact Data is read from the specified relay of the relay area information g Key Point Commands and responses used with the ET LAN unit have a dedicated header added to the MEWTOCOL DAT communication procedure of the FP series PLC sa Reference For detailed information on MEWTOCOL DAT please see Chapter 12 8 2 Data Transfer Procedure When data is being transferred with a programmable controller open processing is used to specify the MEWTOCOL communication mod
282. se the number of times that data is sent See page 5 9 When using UDP IP the above settings are invalid so data should be re sent through the application 2 Increasing the timeout judgment time When executing data transmission commands SEND RECV increase the value set for the CPU unit system register No 32 See page 13 24 3 2 Connection for LAN Cable 3 2 1 100BASE TX and 10BASE T Connections AFP2790 Retainer Check to make sure this has been poressed upwords if OOBASE TX 10BASE T is being used Push up Not used 100BASE TX 10BASE T connector RJ45 UTP cable 100BASE TX 40BASE T A O 10BASE T hub connector RJ45 Not used In an environment with a high noise level a ferrite core should be added near the UTP cable unit UTP cable H 100BASE TX 100BASE TX EA E 10BASE T Ti 10BASE T hub connector RJ45 In an environment with a high noise level a ferrite core should be added near the UTP cable unit 100BASE T and 10BASE T connections Connect the UTP cable to the 100BASE TX 10BASE T connector RJ45 on the front panel of the ET LAN unit UTP cable Use Category 5 UTP cable According to the ratings Category 3 or better cable can be used with 10BASE T but we recommend that you use Category 5 UTP cable which provides higher reliability According to the ratings UTP cable can be up to 100 m in length but considering noise resistance we recomme
283. sed Additionally the following two items should be conducted if necessary Registering e mail addresses in the Address Book Configurator ET Editing the signature E E mail settings For these settings use the setup tool Receive filter settings Set the Receive Filter when you would like to enhance the security in receiving e mails using the request e mail function Download Download the settings into the ET LAN gt la Reference For details concerning the setting procedure and items refer to Control Configurator ET Operational Guide Book ARCT1F341E or On line HELP in the Configurator ET tool 11 3 Operation Environment Communication between e mail server and ET LAN via SMTP POP Intranet Internet ET LAN unit conducts the SMTP communication with the e mail server SMTP server at Port No 25 and the POP communication with the POP server at Port No 110 E mail communication cannot be conducted with the ports other than ones noted above E mails can be sent and received in the environment that Internet is available Perform the settings required for the e mail function according to the instructions by the Internet provider or network administrator IES Note To avoid the malfunction affected by unauthorized incoming e mails perform the specified setting so that unauthorized e mails cannot be received in the e mail server on the ET LAN unit Concerning
284. seeeees 1 2 Well Features xecceh fetietesc cage Nels heceeiees a Het Ta raaa aa Mein a a aad Ne aaaea eave 1 2 Wt Umt Type ecen eave A eile eae NS 1 3 TIa Siructure of Network oromni enai a a a a N E ia a cteaaeni 1 3 1 1 4 Connecting to a NetWwork s ssssssssssssssssssiessissrissrissrissrtnnttutttnnttunttnnttnntnnntnnntnnnnnnnnnn nnn 1 4 1 1 5 Connections Between Networks cccsccccecsscceceesneceeessneeeeeseeeeeesseeeessseeeeseneeeenees 1 6 1 2 Overview of ET LAN Unit FunctionS ssssssssssnseennnnennunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn na 1 7 k2 FUNCIO MOEN eases ee cece a a aa a aa a aaa a aaa eaa Na 1 7 1 2 2 Communication FUNCTIONS cceceeecceestececeeeneeeeeceaeeeeessaeeeeessaeeeeesaeeeeesiaeeeessneeeeneas 1 8 1 2 3 Self Diagnosis Functions ecccceeeeeseeceeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeaaeseneeecaeeesaeeeeeeeee 1 10 1 3 Restrictions on Units Combination s ssssssssssunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 1 11 1 3 1 Restrictions on Current Consumption ssssssesssessiesssssissretistrintttnttnnntnnntnnnrnnnnnnnt 1 11 1 3 2 Restrictions on Installation Position ssessseseneeneeeessnnnnensseernnnnrnnsssrnnnnnnnnssrrnnnnnnnnne 1 11 1 3 3 Restrictions on Number of Units that can be Installed eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 12 1 4 Restrictions on Unit Version and Functions ccccesseececeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeseeesnenseeesnees 1 12 1 4 1 Functions of ET LAN
285. setting block Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Offset Name address 0 Setting a 1 to 8 application being used connections Default rea for 0000H Set value and explanation Set value 1 word data that sets the communication conditions for the various connections as bit information 15 1413121110 9 8 7 6 43210 eae Aa i a Communication b Open method Bit c Application in which method 00 Active connection is used 0 TCP IP 10 Unpassive 0 Used as MEWTOCOL 1 UDP IP 11 Fullpassive communication 1 Used as transparent communication a Communication method Specify whether the communication method for each connection is TCP IP or UDP IP When using the data transfer function always set TCPIIP b Opening method This is valid only when TCP IP was specified as the communication method Active open Connection is actively established Fullpassive open System waits for reception from a specified partner node in order to establish a connection Unpassive open System waits for reception from an unspecified partner node in order to establish a connection c Application in which connection is used When using computer linking or data transfer set O MEWTOCOL communication When using transparent communication set 1 Transparent communication 15 12 Of
286. snseeeeeanes 15 5 15 4 Table of Related Relays Registers and Instructions cccccsesseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 15 25 15 4 1 System Register cccccecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeecaeeseaaeseeneeceaeeesaaeseeaaeseaeeeseaeeesaesseneeeeaees 15 25 15 4 2 Special Internal Relay c ccccceessceceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeseneeeeaees 15 26 15 4 3 System Register cccccecceceseeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeecaeeeeaaeseeneecaeeesaaeseeaaeseeeescaeeeeaesseneessaees 15 27 15 5 Minimum Transmission Delay Time cccssseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeeenseeneesnseenenenseenenes 15 28 15 6 AS CI COGS e e raa r a tencceehtvarceuttasentestuceccuunecncechtucesonoteccucatin 15 30 137 Dimensions 22sec cceo cts sins chas ra aara ta si ncahed coszcdeee tected ca sauddecd EENAA AARS 15 31 102 Sample Program iiron erai eeann aean aaae eaaa u eead 16 1 16 1 Sample Program a E r a anid e a a aea edie neds 16 2 16 1 1 An Overview of the Sample Program ccccccesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 2 16 1 2 Workstation Sample Program ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseeeeeeeeess 16 3 16 1 3 Communication Setting Program on PLC Side cccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeeees 16 8 vi Compatibility with the FP3 Differences with the FP3 ET LAN unit The main differences between the specifications and operation of the FP2 ET LAN unit and the FP3 ET LAN unit are given in
287. specifies the number of routers used on the source network The default router gateway is not included in the number of registered routers This is effective as long as the network subnetwork mask field is anything other than 0 Any value higher than 5 will be treated as 5 The number of network addresses and router IP addresses registered should not exceed the number specified here 235H Router 1 network 0000H Set value Network subnetwork address of partner node subnetwork This specifies the network subnetwork address for an adjacent address L network connected through the router 236H Router 1 network 0000H 00000000H and FFFFFFFFH will cause errors to occur subnetwork address H 237H Router 1 Router 0000H Set value Router IP address IP address L The network subnetwork address for the router address must be 238H Router 1 Router 0000H identical to the network subnetwork address for the source node IP 15 10 IP address H address If they are different an error will occur 00000000H and FFFFFFFFH will cause errors to occur Address Name Default Set value and explanation 239H Router 2 Network subnetwork address L 0000H Refer to address 235H to 238H 23AH Network subnetwork address H 23BH Router IP address L 23CH Router IP address H 23DH Router 3 Net
288. ssing E mail is not sent to the ET LAN does not specified e mail address receive any e mails Has the initialization processing completed Has the initialization processing completed Execute the initialization processing correctly Is the ET LAN E1 E2 error LED turning ON or blinking Is the ET LAN E1 E2 error LED turning ON or blinking NO NO Read the error log from the error log area to check the error Then YES perform re setting YES Is one time 1 is added to the e mail send complete times in the e mail status check area Is one time 1 is added to the e mail receive check times in the e mail status check area NO NO Check if the specified e mail send YES receive conditions are satisfied YES Is the e mail destination address valid NO Specify the correct destination YES e mail address Ask the e mail administrator about Ask the e mail administrator about the e mail server status the e mail server status POP e mail server does not have an error SMTP e mail server does not have an error YES YES Ask the e mail server Turn on the power again administrator When the problem is not solved even if the power is ON Replace Turn on the power again When the problem is not solved even if the power is ON Replace the unit with a spare unit Even the unit with a spare unit Even whe
289. ssing Procedure cessceeeeeeeetteeeeteteeeeees 5 5 5 2 3 Writing Data to the Initialization Information Setting Area ccceeeeceeteeeseeeeeeees 5 6 5 2 4 Writing Data to the Routing Information Setting Area ceccceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 5 12 5 3 Reading Initialization Information cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee seeneeeeseeneeseseeneeseeesnenenseenenes 5 17 5 4 Sample Program vcciscecicces sccececeed ceseey cote cacecs scents cnet ce stezentuasencets qued apee Seaga aa aai Taspen 5 19 6 Open Processing and Close Processing cccccesseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 1 6 1 Open Close ProCeSSiing eoe araram ihoceececdcodcea ice eevesecoeuetdoccestiecurcessecccectipersseestoneesttecesete 6 2 6 1 1 Whats Open ProGeSsing ie ccsvtecegseatavhedeetedyetebadvetegeteceets tavtadeedely ee daleesetelaaveteatavbeleets 6 2 6 1 2 Types0t Open Processing sei eiaeia aaa aa aa aani aaa a a AT aaaea 6 4 6 2 Processing PrOCOCUIES csseeececeseeeceeesneeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeensneeeesnseeeeeseseeeeeseseeeeeseseeeeeenseeneees 6 7 6 2 1 An Overview of the Open Processing Procedure sssssessiessirssrnssrresrrssrrssrrssrrssrns 6 7 6 2 2 An Overview of the Close Processing Procedure cccccccseeeeeseeceeeeeeeteeeenaeeeeneeees 6 8 6 2 3 Writing Data to the Connection Information Setting Area ccccceeesceeeeeeetteeeeeeeees 6 9 6 3 Reading Connection Information ccsseccesceeeeseeseeeens
290. ssing Procedure 1 Check to make sure the open complete signal is on 2 Turn off the open request signal 3 Check to make sure the open complete signal is off Timing chart for open and close processing Setting values writing Shared memory wr EEE accessing Confirmation that communication processing has been completed Open request 2 To next processing N To beginning of communication processing 4 A m we z Open F 55 Y complete Open processing signal Open processing Communication 6 2 3 Writing Data to the Connection Information Setting Area The necessary data is written to the connection information setting area Bank 0 Addresses 250H to 2CFH of the shared memory using the shared memory writing instructions F151 WRT and P151 PWRT Address 250H to 25FH 260H to yaar 26FH Initialization information 270H setting area to Shared memory Routing information setting 27FH oo area 280H to Jaa Bank 0 User system Connection information 28FH area setting area Address n 290H to Initialization information 250H to 2CFH 29FH notified area 2A0H Connection information to notified area 2AFH s 2B0H Handshake area to andshake are 2BFH 2COH Error log area to 2CFH Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Connection 1 information setting block Connection 2 information setting block Connection
291. st signal is turned off 7 The error log notified complete signal is turned off If the next error log is to be read always check to make sure that this error log notified complete signal has gone off Writing reading Reading of Shared setting error log memory accessing Error log request signal Ladder program processing Error log notified complete signal ET LAN unit processing Processing on ET LAN unit side 12 5 12 2 2 Sample Program The sample program applies when the ET LAN unit has been installed in slot no 0 This program read the error log information to data registers DT60 to DT75 Error log notified complete signal Receive complete signal RF request signal H P150 READ HO H388 K2 DT60 Error log notified complete signal P150 READ HO H390 K2 DT62 P150 READ HO H398 K2 DT64 P150 READ HO H3A0 K2 DT66 P150 READ HO H3A8 K2 DT68 P150 READ HO H3BO K2 DT70 P150 READ HO H3B8 K2 DT72 P150 READ HO H3CO K2 DT74 Internal relay allocation R9010 H F150 READ HO H360 H2 WRO Always on Complete signal relay area F151 WRT HO WR4 H2 H368 Request signal R9013 area H Fo mv H3 DT50 J Initialization pulse relay Fo Mv H1 DT 51 Jeee Fo MV H7 DT 52 ARTERE F151 WRT HO DT50 K3 H380 RI RF n Error log notified Allocation of complete signal area Allocation of RO to RIF handshake F area
292. successfully 10 10 10 1 6 Sample Program Data Transfer Program contents Data is transferred between two ET LAN units The sample program is for an ET LAN unit installed in Slot No 0 and covers communication settings up to where the SEND instruction is executed after the connection is opened as a result of the contents noted below After the connection has been opened no communication program is necessary on the PLC side which receives the MEWTOCOL DAT command l Command gt I 96 I 2 lt Response 2 Receiving of command messages and sending ET LAN unit of response messages To transfer the data the following procedures are required Internal relay and data register allocation Communication setting Initialization processing and open processing Data transfer Communication setting can be performed as shown below When the auto connection function is not used Setting is performed only using the ladder program Case 1 When the auto connection function is used When using the setup tool Configurator ET Connection setting using the ladder program Case 2 1 Connection setting using the setup tool Configurator ET Case 2 2 The ladder programs required for the aforementioned cases are shown in the following pages 10 11 Case 1 When the auto connection function is not used Setting is performed only using the ladder program The
293. system Check the system The RMT LED connection connection connection settings blinks When error Connection was automatically Check if the network is not the error closed and could not be re busy occurs to all opened the system connections 1 to 3 RMT and E2 LEDs blink Note The access errors from 8000H other than the above also occur in the system connection When an error related to the system connection occurs the followings are set as the connection number in the latest log block area System connection 1 F1H System connection 2 F2H System connection 3 F3H 12 18 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 1 Operation If an Error Occurs 13 1 1 Operation If the ALARM LED on the ET LAN Unit Lights What the Alarm ALM LED does The alarm ALM LED on the ET LAN unit lights if the watchdog timer in the unit is activated to warn of a problem ALM LED ALM LED RDYTXRXTEST E1 EXALM RDY TX AX TEST E1 EXALM 1008 108T 10B512V RMT 100B 10BT CPU unit operation when the Alarm ALM LED lights The ERROR LED on the CPU unit lights and operation stops The error code to be occurred in the CPU unit is 41 intelligent unit error If it is necessary to continue operation change the setting of the CPU unit system register 22 13 1 2 Operation If the E1 or E2 LED on the ET LAN Unit Lights or Flashes How the ERROR LEDs work The ERROR LEDs on the ET LAN unit light or
294. t after the power supply is turned off and then on again the problem may have been caused by noise or another temporary phenomenon Continue operation and watch for further signs of trouble 13 2 2 If the E1 LED on the ET LAN Unit Lights or Flahses Situation Lighted Initialization open or communication processing was completed but an error occurred Flashing An error occurred in the communication control unit Solution 1 Use the error log reading program to read the erro log See page 12 5 Solution 2 Take the appropriate action based on the contents of the error log See page 12 7 3 Key Point The following will cause aborted processing An incorrect IP address setting or station number setting Processing was not carried out in the sequence of initialization open communication processing The MEWTOCOL communication format was incorrect 13 2 3 If the E2 LED on the ET LAN Unit Lights or Flashes Situation Lighted A system error has occurred in the ET LAN unit itself Flashing Something has occurred to which the user should be alerted because it may be a potential problem Solution 1 Use the error log reading program to read the erro log See page 12 5 Solution 2 Take the appropriate action based on the contents of the error log See page 12 7 If a system error has occurred turn the power supply off and then on again If the error still occurs please contact your dealer
295. t processing again initialization processing 8008H Termination An error occurred when the ET Run the termination processing error LAN unit was carrying out processing again termination processing 800AH Source node A value other than 1 to 64 was Correct the source node MEWTOCOL set for the source node MEWTOCOL station station number MEWTOCOL station number number error 12 7 Code Name Description Step to take Remark 8010H Open error An attempt was made to Run the open processing execute open processing after the initialization Open although initialization processing has been processing processing was not completed completed end code successfully 8011H Application use A setting other than Active Correct the setting area for There are also error Fullpassive or Unpassive was the application being used stored in offset entered when using TCP IP not address 0 of the applicable if UDP IP is being open processing used end code of the 8012H Source node 0 was set for the source node Correct the source node connection port No error port number during open port number information notified processing area 8013H Partner node 0 was set for the partner node Correct the partner node port No error port number in a mode other port number than TCP IP Unpassive during open processing 8014H Partner node IP During open processing Correct the IP address of add
296. t the point when the power supply is turned on Description of test content ar CT 1 C1 to C8 1TTTITIITOSs ROY TXAXTEST E1 E2 ALM RDY TX RX TEST E1 E2 ALM 100B 10BT 10B512V RMT 100B 10BT RMT Confirmation method LED displa Item Description i When Error code 7 TEST When when error error LED testing occurs occurs Modesetti The current status of the mode setting switches 1 to Visually check i q 4 is displayed on LEDs C1 to C4 All the LEDs go Lights whether the LEDs switch test off after about one second light All LEDs go off then on for one second After this the LED ff and each LED s on for 0 5 E gt de ok sae f J Visually check whether the LED test seconds then off in the following order LEDs light C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 RDY TEST E1 9 E2 ALM 100B 10BT 10B5 and RMT Checks whether or not the result of 1 byte binary iti f th ire ROM is 0 The check C1 ROM test addition of the entire ROM area is 0 The c jec sum C1 9010H value is set so that the result of the last addition of E1 the ROM is 0 Writes AAH to every byte in RAM area and reads C1 to2 RAM test C1 to2 9011H every byte to check that the value matches AAH E1 Shared Checks in the same way as the RAM test but does C1 to3 a Oat y Lights C1 to3 9012H memory test not check the top 2k bytes E1 i 1to4 Tim rtest oe whether or not the time generates an Ci to4 C1 to 9016H
297. te signal area Bank 0 is ON 4 The e mail error log area Bank 10H Addresses from 200H in the e mail error log area of the shared memory is read 5 The e mail error log request signal is turned OFF 6 The e mail error log complete signal is turned OFF To read the next error log be sure to confirm that this e mail error log notified complete signal has been OFF v a E Ww i o D N 73 Q oO o S a Reference lt Chapter 4 Confirming the Design Contents gt 11 24 11 10 3 Reading E mail logs Contents of the send log block Send log blocks can be registered in the e mail send log area A newer e mail send log is continuously registered in the starting send log block When the number of the send log block exceeds 32 the older log that is stored in the e mail send log area s last block is overwritten Send log blocks Bank 11H Address 0000H 01FFH Offset address Name Description 0 L Date Min 0 H Date Time 1 L Date Day 1 H Date Month Date and time when e mail is sent 2 Send e mail The send e mail message No identification No 3 Reserved Reserved Used in the system Specifying To 4 Higher 16 bits Nos 1 16 Specifying To 5 Lower 16 bits Nos 17 32 Specifying Cc 6 Higher 16 bits Nos 1 16 Specifying Cc 7 Lower 16 bits Nos 17 32 Specifying Bcc 8 Higher 16 bits Nos 1 16 Sp
298. than or equal to the log reading pointer the number of log block being read If anything else is specified the results will be unclear 382H Number of reading Set value No of reading blocks Default 0000H 384H log block This specifies the number of blocks up to the old block to be read from the log block reading point A value of 14 or less should be set If a value of 15 or higher is set or if 0 is set 14 blocks will be read 383H Reserved Used by the system 385H Log buffer size Stored value Log buffer size available with the unit itself number of log blocks Set value 0100H 256 blocks This is set by the unit itself when it boots 386H Total number of log Stored value Cumulative total of log blocks recorded after initialization processing This is cleared to 0 when initialization processing is carried out The number of logs is counted up to FFFFH 65535 but if an attempt is made to record more logs than will fit into the available buffer space logs are overwritten starting with the oldest The number of logs will not be incremented past FFFFH 65535 387H Number of log blocks used Stored value Current number of log blocks available for reading in log buffer This is cleared to 0 when initialization processing is carried out The count of the number of logs used will not be incremented past the buffer size 15 23 Address Name Exp
299. the area can be checked using the shared memory readout menu in the programming tool E mail send log area lt Bank 11H Addresses 000H to 1FFH gt E mail send history is stored when e mail error log is requested Up to the latest 32 e mail send blocks can be stored The contents of the area can be checked using the shared memory readout menu in the programming tool E mail receive log area lt Bank 11H Addresses 200H to 3FFH gt E mail receive history is stored when e mail error log is requested Up to the latest 32 e mail receive blocks can be stored The contents of the area can be checked using the shared memory readout menu in the programming tool Reference Shared memory readout menu in the programming tool 1 On the Tools menu select Display PLC Shared memory This reads the PLC 2 Specify the slot No and the bank No 3 The log information is read 4 4 Handshake Method 4 4 1 Handshake Method Handshake method The CPU unit and ET LAN unit carry out initialization and termination processing open and close processing various types of communication processing requests and confirmation of completion by means of a handshake There are two types of handshake one using the I O and one using the shared memory Both types can be used at the same time Handshakes using the I O and using the shared memory Item I O handshaking Shared memory handshaking Operation The various processes are e
300. the auto initialization processing is invalid amp Reference Chapter 5 Initialization Processing and Termination Processing Open processing by the ladder program When the auto connection function is ON Setting mode switch 2 is ON and the auto open processing is invalid a check mark is placed in The connection 1 to 8 are set by ladder program check box with the dedicated setup tool Configurator ET or when the auto connection function is OFF Setting mode switch 2 is OFF the open processing of the connection by the ladder program is performed At this time the auto open processing is invalid A Reference Chapter 6 Open Processing and Close Processing 10 3 Setup procedure using the auto connection function and setup tool Configurator ET For the auto connection function it is necessary to set up each information as shown in the diagram below with the setup tool Configurator ET Settings using a Configurator ET Source node setting Setting menus using the setup Initialization Time setting tool Configurator ET information setting Transparent Egy ETAN Unit communication setting I initialization Settings fg System Connection Settings R i z System connection System connection Pp Connection Settings information inforamtion H A Mail Settings Connection information N Connection information dh Note The setting is valid when a check mark is not placed
301. the bit data 7 Specifying Cc Lower 16 bits Nos 17 32 8 Specifying Bcc Higher 16 bits Nos 1 16 ET 3 E mail address No set for Bcc is stored using the bit data 9 Specifying Bec Lower 16 bits Nos 17 32 A E Reserved Reserved Used in the system F Error code E mail receive e rrors Bank 10H Address 0200H 03FFH Offset address Name Explanation 0 H Date Time 0 L Date Min L ae Date and time when e mail is received 1 H Date Month 1 L Date Day 2 E From Noe E mail source address ASCII 26 characters of the received e mail F Error code BEST Note 1 When the e mail source address is indicated in more than 27 characters the characters later than the 27 character ar e omitted 11 23 Time chart for reading e mail error log Reading of e mail Shared error log memory accessing E mail error log request signal Ladder program processing E mail error log complete signal 7 ET LAN unit Sring toN i share processing masa Procedure to read e mail error logs 1 The e mail error log notified request signal is turned ON The address 36AH bit 5 in the e mail request signal area Bank 0 is turned ON 2 The e mail error log is transferred to the shared memory 3 Confirm that the e mail error log complete signal Bank 0 is ON Confirm that the address 362H bit 5 in the e mail comple
302. the correct format code 72H Time out error When using the data transfer function Timeout error occurred while waiting for a transmission answer Steps to take Use the application program to send the transmission again 73H Time out error When using the data transfer function Timeout error occurred while waiting for the transmission buffer to become empty Steps to take Use the application program to send the transmission again 74H Time out error When using the data transfer function Timeout error occurred while waiting for a response Steps to take Use the application program to send the transmission again 14 33 14 34 Chapter 15 Specifications 15 1 Tables of Performance Specifications 15 1 1 General Specifications Item Description Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Storage temperature 20 to 70 C Ambient humidity Storage humidity Vibration resistance Shock resistance Noise resistance Environment Current consumption 30 to 85 RH at 25 C no condensing 10 to 55 Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude o f0 75 mm 10 min on 3 axes 98 m s2 4 times on 3 axes 1 500 Vp p pulse width 1us for 50ns based on in house measurements Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust 670 mA or less at 5 V DC External power supply for transceiver when 10BASE5 AUI is used 12 V DC 1 A max internal voltage drop 1 V max Weig
303. the table below Refer to the reference page numbers given for each item for details regarding specifications and operation See page 1 4 Item FP2 ET LAN unit FP3 ET LAN unit Communication interface 100BASE TX 10BASE T and 10BASE5 10BASE5 Mode setting switch See page 2 3 1 100BASE TX 10BASE T and 10BASE5 switch 2 Reserved 3 Normal mode test mode switch 4 Test mode operation selection 1 Test mode operation selection 2 Handshake mode selection 3 ONLINE OFFLINE switch 4 Normal mode test mode switch See page 4 8 Mounting The following quantities can be inserted in any of The following quantities can be inserted position qty the master backplane slots including Multi wiring in any of the master backplane slots limits link unit MEWNET W2 mode including MEWNET H link unit See page 1 11 With the FP2 CPU unit 3 units FP3 FP10SH CPU unit 3 units and 1 12 With the FP2SH CPU unit 8 units i Handshaking I O handshaking and shared memory handshaking Tie mode setting switch IS used ip switch can be used simultaneously between I O handshaking and shared memory handshaking Handshake signals See pages 4 9 to 4 12 I O handshaking signals Deleted I O handshake mode flag XE Shared memory handshake signal Deleted I O handshake mode flag bank 0 360H bit E Added Expansion complete signal area 2 bank 0 366H Shared memory See page 15 5 Connection data notifica
304. ther hierarchy communication for MEWTOCOL DAT Host computer command transmission source Ethernet LAN Fa e fa 5 xo w E y wo m Multi wire link unit MEWNET W2 mode S yew Specifies the route number of this unit S Ethernet LAN Specifies the MEWTOCOL staiton number of this unit MEWNET W2 Ethernet LAN z8 Specifies the route number of this unit g 2 Depth 1 E Multi wire link unit MEWNET W2 mode E Specifies the MEWTOCOL station number of this unit g Ethernet LAN 5 MWENET H link unit Specifies the route number of this unit 3rd hierarchy Depth 2 Seeks Ethernet LAN Specifies the MEWTOCOL staiton number of this unit MEWNET H ierarch h m x if i Depth 3 daniu MWENET H link unit Specifies the MEWTOCOL station number of this unit 8 17 8 18 Chapter 9 Transparent Communication Function 9 1 An Overview of the Transparent Communication Function 9 1 1 What is the Transparent Communication Function With the transparent communication function data can be sent and received transparently between a computer and a programmable controller and between two programmable controllers Communication data can be stored to and retrieved from the programmable controller by reading from and writing to the reception buffer of the shared memory in the ET LAN unit Communication requests and other commands are executed by t
305. tialization complete signal E mail complete signal area R20 to R2F R22 E mail send complete signal R23 E mail send error signal E mail request signal area R40 to R4F R42 E mail send request signal Customized contact R300 R300 User defined contact Data register allocation Classification Device No Settings Settings for program example E mail sending DT300 to DT301 Destination address Address No 1 0000 0001H processing For specifying To DT302 to DT303 Destination address Address Nos 6 and 32 For specifying Cc 8000 0020H DT304 to DT305 Destination address Not used 0000 0001H For specifying Bcc DT306 Specifying Message No Message No 1 0001H DT307 Specifying Signature No Signature No 5 0005H Program example R9 010 F150 READ E mail send error signal Initialization compiel snide compile signe a R22 R300 1 7t E mail send complete signal R23 E mail send error signal 11 18 HO H 360 Always on relay F150 READ HO H 362 F151 WRT HO ER 4 E mail request R9010 signal area HIFI omy H1 DT 300 Always on relay Fi omy H 80000020 OT 302 F1 OMY HO OT 304 F0 uy H1 OT 306 F0 uy H 5 DT 307 F151 WRT H 1000 DT 300 RC R300 R22 R23 i a WR 0 Complete signal area Allocation of complete signal area RO to R1F Allocation of e mail complete signal area R20 to R2F Allocation of e mail request signal area R40 to R4F Specify
306. tion invalid Mode setting switch 2 is OFF 01H Auto connection function valid Mode setting switch 2 is ON Open processing setup status is stored OOH Tool setup valid Ladder setup invalid 01H Ladder setup valid Tool setup invalid Connection status of System connection 1 is stored OOH Open processing Waiting 01H Open processing Completed 02H Connection Connecting FFH Open processing Ended in an error 043H System connection 2 status Connection status of System connection 2 is stored OOH Open processing Waiting 01H Open processing Completed 02H Connection Connecting FFH Open processing Ended in an error 044H System connection 3 status Connection status of System connection 3 is stored OOH Open processing Waiting 01H Open processing Completed 02H Connection Connecting FFH Open processing Ended in an error 045H Reserved 04FH Reserved Used in the system 10 5 10 1 2 Auto Initialization Processing What is Auto initialization processing Based on the information set by the setup tool Configurator ET initialization processing is automatically conducted when the power is supplied When this processing is performed initialization processing using the ladder program is not required Even if the initialization processing is set using the ladder program the setting is ignored In the auto initialization processing initialization
307. tion block bank 0 2E0H to 35FH Added Receive processing complete code offset address A Receive unnotified data size offset address B Receive unnotified data size copy offset address C Test mode See page 3 6 Test items Mode setting switch test LED test ROM test RAM test Shared memory test Timer test Internal loopback test External loopback test Added Mode setting switch test Deleted EEPROM checksum test Modified LED display during testing and error ONOaARWND Test items LED test ROM test RAM test Shared memory test EEPROM checksum test Timer test Internal loopback test External loopback test ONOOAARWN Error log See page 12 7 Error codes added 8036H MEWTOCOL transmission error Error codes deleted 8006H OFFLINE error 8009H Mode change error 8019H Forced close error BO01H B002H ONLINE OFFLINE switching error during operation Ladder program Ladder programs created using the FP3 can be used without modification vii Difference between AFP2790 and AFP27901 Available communication functions vary between AFP2790 and AFP27901 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 AFP2790 Available Available Available AFP27901 Available Available Not available Note AFP27901 has no 10BASE5 connector Other functions are common viii Chapter 1 Unit Functions and Restrictions 1 1 Features a
308. tion function setting between networks Source node MEWTOCOL station number TCP ULP packet existence duration Initialization information TCP zero window timer value setting area TCP re transmission timer value Receiving buffer starting address for transparent communication Receiving buffer size for transparent communication Transmission buffer starting address for transparent communication Transmission buffer size for transparent communication Network subnetwork masking Default router IP address pein niormation setting Number of registering router area Router network subnetwork address Router IP address Operation of the ET LAN unit Initializaton processing The unit is booted before the connection open separately for each unit processing is carried out Open processing separately for each connection In computer linking data transmission and transparent communication communication can be carried out with up to 8 connections altogether Computer linking Communication Data transfer processing Transparent communication Close processing separately for each connection Termination processing The unit is stopped after close processing has been separately for each unit carried out for all of the connections The relationship between initialization processing and open processing Initialization Open Close Termination p
309. tion section in the unit lt Internal loopback test gt lt External loopback test gt ET LAN unit ET LAN unit LAN circuit LAN circuit Control When running an external loopback test the ET LAN unit should be connected to the LAN circuit Ac Note If you conduct an external loopback test when other nodes are communicating on the LAN there is a chance that an error may occur Either take steps to ensure that other nodes will not communicate or disconnect the other nodes before performing an external loopback test 3 3 2 Running Test Modes How the test modes are run Set the mode setting switches on the rear of the ET LAN unit to the settings indicated in the table below and then turn on the power supply to the programmable controller When this has been done either test mode 1 or test mode 2 can be run To exit a test mode turn off the power supply to the programmable controller uuu iad Factory settings All off position Switch No Off On 1 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 2 Auto connection function is not available Auto connection function is available 3 Normal mode Test mode 4 Test mode 1 8 Test mode 2 N Note1 Switching between 100BASE TX and 10BASE T is done automatically by auto negotiation function Always turn it off when using AFP27901 Note2 Invalid when the switch 3 is off 3g Key Point The settings of the mode setting switches become effective a
310. tner node is set in the connection information setting area Bank 0 Addresses 250H to 2CFH 2 The open request signal is turned on Hand Open request signal bit shake Conne Conne Conne Conne Conne Conne Conne Conne method ction 1 ction 2 ction 3 ction 4 ction 5 ction 6 ction 7 ction 8 When I O is used for Y30 Y32 Y34 Y36 Y38 Y3A Y3C Y3E handshake When Bank 0 Address 369H shared memory Bito Bit 2 Bit 4 Bit 6 Bit 8 Bit A Bit C Bit E used for handshake 3 Check to make sure the pen complete signal is on Hand Open request signal bit shake Conne Conne Conne Conne Conne Conne Conne Conne method ction 1 ction 2 ction 3 ction 4 ction 5 ction 6 ction 7 ction 8 When I O is used for X10 X12 X14 X16 X18 X1A X1C X1E handshake When Bank 0 Address 361H shared ON Bito Bit 2 Bit 4 Bit 6 Bit 8 Bit A Bit C Bit E used for handshake ae Note The connection information setting area should be specified before open processing is carried out the request signal goes on Changes to the connection information setting area are invalid while the open complete signal is on To change the contents of the area first close the connection and then carry out re open processing after the changes have been made The open request signal should be kept on until close processing is carried out 6 2 2 An Overview of the Close Proce
311. truction Writes data to the I O or register of the partner node RECV instruction Reads data from the I O or register of the partner node cS Note When using the data transfer function TCP IP should be used in order to assure the reliability of the communication 3g Key Point With data transfer the programmable controller specifies an IP address and a MEWTOCOL station number 1 to 64 and opens a connection with the computer partner node in the MEWTOCOL communication mode After the connection has been opened the communication destination is specified only by the MEWTOCOL station number 1 to 64 in the ladder program on the programmable controller side Data transfer enables up to eight simultaneous connections in conjunction with other communication functions using a single ET LAN unit There is no need to notate a program to handle communication after the connection has been opened for the programmable controller on the side that receives the data transfer command The computer link function and data transmission function can be run on the same connection at the same time 8 1 2 Commands and Functions that can be Used Data transfer commands and MEWTOCOL DAT command messages Executing a data transfer command sends a MEWTOCOL DAT command message to the partner node programmable controller which then automatically returns a response message oom lt erne re Reception of command mes
312. uest signal Connection 3 Y25 Y35 Y26 Transmission request signal Connection 2 Y36 Open request signal Connection 4 Y27 Y37 Y28 Receive request signal Connection 3 Y38 Open request signal Connection 5 Y29 Y39 Y2A Transmission request signal Connection 3 Y3A Open request signal Connection 6 Y2B Y3B Y2C Initialization request signal Y3C Open request signal Connection 7 Y2D Y3D Y2E Error LED flash off signal See note Y3E Open request signal Connection 8 Y2F Error log notified request signal Y3F Note If the Error LED flash off signal Y2E is turned on the flashing LEDs for E1 and E2 go out Also while the Error LED flash off signal Y2E is on the LEDs for E1 and E2 will not flash even if a recoverable error or a warning error occurs However these functions are not affected by error log processing so the error contents remain in the log 15 4 15 3 Table of Shared Memory Shared memory Initialization information setting area Routing information setting area User system area Connection information setting area Initialization information notified area Connection information notified area Handshake area Error log area Bank 0 Address 200H to 22FH Shared memory addresses are allocated in word units Initialization information setting area Bank 0 Address Name Default Set value
313. ullpassive open Cromv Kao orz Jesrsreeseessessssessesessaseaseensessseeseesae 4 Source node port No 8000 F1 OMV H COABOIO orz Destination node IP address 192 168 1 2 C0A80102 Cromv K 000 oT Destination node port No 8000 mer Open Cromv H5 oT25 Destination node MEWTOCOL station No 05 processing Writing to connection information setting area of Crist WRT HO DT K6 H250 con ion BF GN In Open request for Connection _ _ _ _ Open error signal at ak after initialization processing has been completed betiakization complete signal Ojah SEE ng R R PISO READ HO 260 KI praw Pisas Error code read if processing ends in error Open error signal reading of connection information notified area apga iois aa ore gt Setting of control data RR REE ERT etenaecsnenenaceensssssnneascossnsneseseaee 1777 Upper word Source node route No 1 Destination node Initialization pulse relay MEWTOCOL station No 5 Lower word Transfer of 3 words RC F900 RIQ R300 a M k F Execution conditions InitianSGND RECY Cen complete signal Initialization complete Connection 1 open complete R9030 ON Data Hi erss seno orar DT 100 oTo K 1000 Foresee Data transfer execution transfer Source node from 100 on 3 words transferred to destination node ia from DT 1000 10 13 Case 2 1 When the auto connection function is used Configurator ET is used and connection setting is performed using the la
314. ultiple Frames cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeee 14 6 14 1 3 List of MEWTOCOL COM Commands cceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeaeeeeeeees 14 8 14 2 MEWTOCOL DAT Data Transfer ccccssseceeesseeeeenseseeeenseeeeeenseecenenseeeenenseeeenes 14 25 14 2 1 Overview of MEWTOCOL DAT cceccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeteneeenaees 14 25 14 2 2 List of MEWTOCOL DAT Commands cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeneeenaees 14 27 14 3 MEWTOCOL Error Codes csccsseccesceeceseeesceeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeeesneeeeeeeesseseseaeenseeeeeeeaeas 14 31 14 3 1 Tablet Error Codes 2 isnie arad tebvecg casita nape heahaciad dttvreesedl eavine ales 14 31 TS SPECHICAUONS sessa adone aaaea praean saan siunduaneceucaassnenduansuescanueiandanstud 15 1 15 1 Tables of Performance Specifications scccsssccsseeeeeseesseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseseenenseeeeeeees 15 2 15 1 1 General Specification ccc ceeeceeeece cece eeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaesseeeeseaeeeeaaeseeneeeeeeeess 15 2 15 1 2 Performance Specifications ccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeee sae eeeeaeseeeeeseeeesaeeseeeeeeeees 15 2 15 1 3 Communication Specifications eccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseeeeeeeees 15 3 15 2 1 0 AlloCatiOn cect dite E ene eh la nee 15 4 15 3 Table of Shared Memory q c cccccccessseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeneeeeeeeeeescaeseseeeeneeeeseeeseseee
315. unauthorized e mail T Reference Chapter 3 6 Outline of Request E mail Function L Note A password must be entered within 16 chatacters Case sensitivity is available for a password E mails that have been regarded as incorrect by the e mail security function are not received The description of the unreceived mail is stored in the receive e mail error log area 11 11 11 7 Outline of Request E mail Function Using the Request Mail function data of the device that is monitored by the programmable controller can be read and written via e mail A Request Mail created based on the specified format can be sent to the ET LAN unit with this function After the ET LAN unit receives the Request Mail it automatically creates the Response Mail in answer to the request e mail and sends back the Response Mail to the computer Request Mail and Response Mail A computer sends a Request Mail to a programmable controller and receives the Response Mail from the controller In this function the computer receives various information from the programmable controller via communication PLC Request Mail Response Mail Internet 11 12 11 7 1 Request Mail Format Format of Request Mail Sent from a computer The format of the request mail to be sent to ET LAN unit is as follows Example of a Request Mail To etlan xxx yyy co jp From pc zzz yyy co jp Subject Request 8 Pas
316. unication is being carried out among the various connections 0000H is set when this is not being used 213H Transmission buffer size for 0400H Set value Size of transmission buffer transparent communication The size of the transmission buffer is specified in Connection 1 word units when transparent communication is being carried out among the various connections FFFFH is set when this is not being used 214H Connection 2 Receiving buffer 3000H The first address in each buffer should be starting address for specified using 2800H to 3FFFH word address transparent See address 210H to 213H communication 215H Receiving buffer 0400H size for transparent communication 216H Transmission buffer 3400H starting address for transparent communication 217H Transmission buffer 0400H size for transparent communication 218H Connection 3 Receiving buffer 3800H starting address for transparent communication 219H Receiving buffer 0400H size for transparent communication 21AH Transmission buffer 3C00H starting address for transparent communication 21BH Transmission buffer 0400H size for transparent communication 15 7 Address Name Default Set value and explanation 21CH Connection 4 Receiving buffer starting address for FFFFH The first address in each buffer transpar
317. units Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area Write data area WD Writes data to a data area Read timer counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer counter Write timer counter set value area WS Writes a timer counter setting value Read timer counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer counter elapsed value Write timer counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored Monitoring start MG Monitors a registered contact or data Preset contact area SC Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 fill command point on and off pattern Preset data area SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a fill command specified range Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Remote control RM Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller Abort AB Aborts communication 14 8 RCS Read contact area single point This reads the on and off status for only one contact Command Contact No 4 characters o x102 x101 x100 Treated as single point Values are for TM CT Normal response Read roces Contact
318. urce node IP address 192 168 1 1 COA80101H Communication between networks not used Source node MEWTOCOL station number Allocation of handshake area for internal relays Initialization processing Open processing Data transfer 8 4 Command Communication on the Computer Side 8 4 1 Communication Data Format 1 Format when the partner node is on the same hierarchy level as the MEWTOCOL communication If there is no other link unit between the computer and the partner node acting as a relay station the partner node is said to be on the same hierarchy level as the computer When the data transfer function is being used between units on the same hierarchy commands and responses are sent and received using the format indicated below LJ Computer command transfer destination Ethernet LAN Same hierarchy t ET LAN unit command transfer destination Format of command transmission data 10H 00H Data size L Data size H 02H 00H 02H 00H Hierarchy level LEVEL Fixed 00H Hierarchy depth DEPTH Fixed OOH Destination for MEVWTOCOLstation No Source for MEWTOCOL station No MEWTOCOL COM command data block Max 2048 bytes Precautions concerning format Format of response received data 10H 00H Data size L Data size H 02H 00H 02H 00H Hierarchy level LEVEL Fixed 00H Hierarchy depth DEPTH Fixed OOH Source for MEWTOCOL station No Destination for MEVVTOCOLstatio
319. ute 210H Receiving buffer starting address for transparent 2800H address word address of the communication Connection 1 shared memory when transparent communication is being carried out among the various connections FFFFH is set if this is not being used Set value Size of receive buffer The size of the receive buffer is Receiving buffer size for transparent specifiediin word units wheri 211H communication Connection 1 0400H transparent communication is being carried out among the various connections 0000H is set if this is not being used Set value First address in send buffer The first address of the send buffer is specified using the absolute 212H Transmission buffer starting address for 2C00H address word address of the transparent communication Connection 1 shared memory when transparent communication is being carried out among the various connections FFFFH is set if this is not being used Set value Size of send buffer The size of the send buffer is oe specified in word units when 213H a n PE argni 0400H transparent communication is being carried out among the various connections 0000H is set if this is not being used 14H Receiving buffer starting address for 3000H transparent communication 15H Receiving buffer size for transparent 0400H Connection communication 26H 2 Transmission buffer starting address 3400H for transparent communication 217H Transmission buffer size for 0400H transparent
320. value and Explanation 0 Open processing complete code Stored value 0 Auto open processing has been completed System connections 1 to 3 successfully Other than 0 Error code when open processing ended in an error When auto open processing is conducted once more the results are overwritten Error codes are also stored in the error log area 1 Source node port No Stored value Source node port number for various connections System connections 1 to 3 after auto open processing has been completed The value is not entered until auto open processing has been successfully completed 2 Destination node IP address L Stored value Destination node IP addresses for various System connections 1 to 3 connections after auto open processing has been completed 3 Destination node IP address H The value is not entered until auto open processing has been System connections 1 to 3 successfully completed 4 Destination node port No Stored value Destination node port number for various connections System connections 1 to 3 after auto open processing has been completed The value is not entered until auto open processing has been successfully completed 5 Destination node MEWTOCOL Stored value Destination node MEWTOCOL station number for station No System connections various connections after auto open processing has been completed 1 to 3 The value is not entered until auto open processing has been successfully completed 6
321. we we ee ee ee ee ne 0000 0000 j 0000 0000 j 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 g Help This receive log block shows that the e mail is received from the source address etlan1_mail_test aaa bbb ccc at 4 58 on Feb 3 4 58 on Feb 3 0200H 0459 0203 6574 6C61 6E32 SF6D 6169 6C5F Y 7465 7374 4061 6161 2E62 6262 2E63 a a Note 0000 E mail source address 26 characters etlan2 mail testfaaa bbb c When the e mail source address is indicated in more than 27 characters the characters later than the 27 character are omitted 11 29 Example of reading the e mail error log area Bank 10H Addresses 200H to 3FFH PLC Shared Memory Display Untitle1 SlotNo 0 BankNo 16 Cursor Address 0257H Hex C Dec ol234567 jal 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 ee ee 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 O000 0000 ee 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 s 1 ee ee eens 01 FoR 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ee ee ee ee 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 O000 02008 0122 0204 0002 0000 8000 0001 0000 0000 eee ee ee ee Latest Error log block send 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 COLL s Error log block Receive Hj 0114 0204 6574 6C61 6E31 SF6D 6169 6C5F etlanl_mail_ g gt 8 7465 7374 4078 7878 782E 797
322. ween networks Bank 0 Address 202H If OOOOH is specified the routing information will be invalid If communication is not to be carried out between networks through a router no settings are necessary for this area 5 12 Routing information setting area 2 bank 0 Address 230H 231H Name Network subnetwork masking L Network subnetwork masking H Default value 0000H 0000H Setting value and explanation FF000000H to FFFFFFFCH Field value that determines network address or subnetwork address The network subnetwork mask is value that sets the 32 bit network address used as the IP address and the bit used for the subnetwork address to 1 Example FFOOOOOOH For a Class A network 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFCOOOOOH When 2 bits are used for a Class A subnetwork 1111 1111 1100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFFFOOOOH For a Class B network 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFFFFOOOH When 4 bits are used for a Class B subnetwork 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 FFFFFFOOH For a Class C network 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 FFFFFFEOH When 3 bits are used for a Class C subnetwork 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1110 0000 An error occurs if FFFFFFDH or higher is specified The network subnetwork address is the address that results from the logical AND of the IP address for a source node and the network subnetwork mask in the same class
323. will be treated as 5 The number of network addresses and router IP addresses registered should not exceed the number specified here 5 13 Address Name noe oe Setting value and explanation Set value Network sub network address 235H Router 1 network subnetwork address L 0000H_ of destination node This specifies the network sub network address for an adjacent network connected through the router 236H Router 1 network subnetwork address H 0000H 00000000H and FFFFFFFFH will cause errors to occur Set value Router IP address 237H Router 1 Router IP address L ooooH The network sub network address for the router address must be identical to the network sub network address for the source node IP address If they are different an error will occur 238H Router 1 Router IP address H 0000H 00000000H and FFFFFFFFH will cause errors to occur 239H Network subnetwork address L 23AH Network subnetwork address H 23BH Routere Router IP address L opor 23CH Router IP address H 23DH Network subnetwork address L 23EH Network subnetwork address H 23FH mouterg Router IP address L ae 240H Router IP address H Refer to the above addresses 235H to 241H Network subnetwork address L 238H 242H Network subnetwork address H 243H Pouteria Router IP address L 0090 244H Router IP addr
324. wing handshake area Shared memory Bank 0 turn on Handshake area Expanded complete request area 2 Bank 0 Address BIT Description of signal 366H bit8 No communication time out signal Connection 1 bit9 No communication time out signal Connection 2 bitA No communication time out signal Connection 3 bitB No communication time out signal Connection 4 bitC No communication time out signal Connection 5 bitD No communication time out signal Connection 6 bitE No communication time out signal Connection 7 bitF No communication time out signal Connection 8 13 3 3 Procedure of Reset Function Procedure 1 Write a value in the following address of the initial information setting area Shared memory Bank 0 to execute the initial processing Initial information setting area Bank 0 Address Name Default Setting value Explanation R he ET LAN unit Wri AAH he ET 204H Reset request flag 1 0000H eset the unit Write 55 to reset the LAN unit R he ET LAN unit Wri AAH he ET 205H Reset request flag 2 0000H ae unit W rite S5AAs toresettne 2 Writing 55AAH in the above address 2 words starts the operation to reset the ET LAN unit Unless either one of the above addresses is 55AAH the unit will not be reset 3 After the reset function has been executed on the ET LAN unit the reset complete notified area Shared memory 206H Bank 0 is set to 90
325. work subnetwork address L 0000H 23EH Network subnetwork address H 23FH Router IP address L 240H Router IP address H 241H Router 4 Network subnetwork address L 0000H 242H Network subnetwork address H 243H Router IP address L 244H Router IP address H 245H Router 5 Network subnetwork address L 0000H 246H Network subnetwork address H 247H Router IP address L 248H Router IP address H 249H Reserved Used by the system 24AH If any value is written to these it should be 0000H 24BH 24CH 24DH 24EH 24FH 15 11 Connection information setting area Bank 0 Address 250H to 25FH 260H to Connection 1 information setting block Connection 2 information setting block Shared memory Initialization information setting area Routing information setting area 26FH 270H to 27FH Connection 3 information setting block 280H to Connection 4 information setting block User system area Connection information setting area Bank 0 28FH Address 290H to Initialization information notified area Connection information notified area Handshake area 250H to 2CFH Connection 5 information setting block 29FH 2A0H to 2AFH 2B0H to 2BFH 2COH Connection 6 information setting block Connection 7 information setting block Error log area to 2CFH Connection 8 information
326. xecuted The various processes are executed by method by reading from and writing to the reading from and writing to the handshaking input contacts X and output contacts Y area allocated to the shared memory in the allocated to the ET LAN unit from the ET LAN unit from the ladder program ladder program Programming The input contacts X and output The F150 READ PREAD P150 F151 cautions contacts Y can be used as it is WRT P151 PWRT instructions are used to reflect the content of the shared memory handshake area to internal relays etc Operation in The output contacts Y all go off At As the shared memory is not changed even PROG mode this time all connections in PROG mode the connection communication routes are closed communication route is not closed forcibly communication not possible However if the connection is closed from Therefore if the CPU unit switches another node when in PROG mode the from RUN to PROG mode due to ET LAN will not execute a process to some error occurring communication reopen it When you switch from PROG stops mode to RUN mode and the reinitialize and re opening processes are not executed we recommend that you construct a program after referring to the flow chart on page 4 16 Limits on the For MEWTOCOL communication all For both MEWTOCOL communication and communicatio processes can be realized using transparent communication all processes n functions connections
327. y value is written it should be OOOOH Default Address Name value Setting value and explanation ae 000FH Setting time Setting value 1 to FFFFH x 2 seconds 20AH pe With TCP this specifies the time that a packet exists existence 30 seconds ge when data transmission etc is carried out duration TCP Setting time Setting value 1 to FFFFH x 2 seconds 0005H With TCP this specifies the time until the receiver 20BH zero window timet vale 10 seconds window size check packet is re sent when the receive window size of the other node becomes 0 TCT Setting time Setting value 1 to FFFFH x 2 seconds 20CH retransmission 0005H With TCP this specifies the time until data is re sent if Ka N 10 seconds ACK is not sent by the other node when data transmission etc is carried out Setting time Setting value 1 to FFFFH x 2 seconds TCP 0001H This specifies the time waited until open processing is 20DH closed timer 2 seconds carried out when the same port is being re opened value when TCP close processing is done by the source node IP 000FH Setting time Setting value 1 to FFFFH x 2 seconds 20EH reassembling 30 seconds 7 This specifies the time waited for the next portion of timer value data when data split by the IP is being received Reserved 20FH Used by the gt If any value is written it should be 0000H system TCP ULP packet existence dur
328. ze of response command section 2 BCC size 1 CR size if err recv sno char amp recvdata recvsize 0 lt 0 return ERROR Receive error Analyzes response data section switch recvdata data 3 case Normal response puts OK break case Error response was received puts ERROR RESPONSE RECEIVED printf ERROR CODE c c n recvdata data 4 recvdata data 5 break default System error Unexpected response was returned puts SYSTEM ERROR break return OK Input unsigned char data MEWTOCOL string of determined data int len MEWTOCOL string data size Return BCC value unsigned char BCC data letn unsigned char data int len unsigned char ans for ans data len ans data return ans 16 7 16 1 3 Communication Setting Program on PLC Side When the PLC is put in RUN mode initialization and open processing are carried out for the ET LAN unit and 01 is set for the MEWTOCOL station number Internal relay allocation Classification Device number Devices used in sample program Complete signal area RO to R1F RC Initialization complete signal Request signal area R40 to R5F R4C Initialization request signal R50 Open request signal Connection 1 Data register allocation Classific

FP2 ET-LAN Unit Technical Manual, ARCT1F322E-7

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents